2016_0616 Live 155_100percent - Addendum_2LIVE 155 PFRA+LDa
155 Pleasant St June 16, 2016
Northampton, MA Addendum #2
ADDENDUM – 1
Page 1 of 169
ADDENDUM - #2
TO
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL
06-16-16
This Addendum modifies, amends and supplements designated parts of the 100% Contract Documents,
Construction Drawings & Project Manual, for the Live 155 mixed use project, dated 06-03-2016, and is
hereby made a part thereof by reference, and shall be as binding as though inserted in its entirety in the
locations designated hereunder. It shall be the responsibility of all Contractors Subcontractors and
Suppliers proposed for the various parts of the work, to incorporate any changes or modifications
contained in this Addendum in their pricing/proposals.
I. ADDENDUM TO THE 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - PROJECT MANUAL:
Addendum to the 100% Contract Documents Project Manual contains numbered item descriptions,
complete revised specification sections, and additional specification sections not previously included in the
100% Project Manual.
Description items are grouped and numbered by specification section number, i.e., 033000.1 is a
modification or addition to the specification section 033000. Complete specification sections and the table
of contents are included with changes identified in bold.
Re-issued or added specification sections will follow the drawing/specification addendum list in this
document.
II. ADDENDUM TO THE 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - DRAWINGS:
Addendum to the 100% Contract Document Drawings contains numbered item descriptions, three
sketches and twelve (12) full size sheets.
Description items are grouped and numbered by discipline (Section), i.e., 4/A210 is a modification or
addition to drawing #2 on the Architectural plan sheet A210.
Sketches and re-issued sheets will follow the drawing/specification addendum list in this document.
LIVE 155 PFRA+LDa
155 Pleasant St June 16, 2016
Northampton, MA Addendum #2
ADDENDUM – 1
Page 2 of 169
I. ADDENDUM TO THE PROJECT MANUAL:
ITEM # SECTION # DESCRIPTION
1 028200 New Specification Section - Asbestos Remediation
2 017419 Supplement to Existing Specification - Waste Management
3 Attachment #1 129 Pleasant St – Suspect ACM Locations
4 064020 Revised Specification Section - Including Solid Surface Countertops
5 270000 New Specification Section - Low Voltage Cabling
6 272000 New Specification Section - IP Phone Systems
7 281000 New Specification Section - Access Control
8 282300 New Specification Section - Video Surveillance
II. ADDENDUM TO THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS:
ITEM # DISCIPLINE DESCRIPTION DWG #
1 ARCH Revised TEL/DATA room plan & ceiling plan. SKA-01/01A
2 ARCH Complete Toilet Accessory Schedule SKA-02
3 ARCH Revised Roof Plan – Fall Protection Anchor Locations A103
4 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S0.01
5 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.01
6 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.02
7 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.03
8 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.04
9 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.05
10 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S3.02
11 PLUMBING Revised drawing. P106
12 TEL/DATA New Drawing SC101
13 TEL/DATA New Drawing SC102
14 TEL/DATA New Drawing SC103
Asbestos Remediation
1
ASBESTOS REMEDIATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description of Work
B. Applicable Regulations
C. Asbestos Removal Submittals
D. References
E. Training and Qualifications
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish all facilities, labor, materials, tools, supervision,
transportation, and equipment necessary to perform removal and disposal of
asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) as specified herein and as shown in
Table 2.
B. A limited pre-renovation survey was performed to identify and quantify ACMs.
This limited survey included the collection and analytical testing of samples of
readily accessible ACMs and did not include the use of destructive or invasive
sampling procedures. Given these limitations, ACMs may be present within
portions of the designated renovation areas that were not readily accessible. The
results of this survey are provided in Table 1 and Laboratory data reports of these
analyses are provided in Appendix 1 for informational purposes only. The
Contractor is responsible for verifying and determining his/her own quantities and
removal/disposal of all ACM as described herein and outlined in Table 2.
C. Asbestos removal Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Proper cleaning, removal, collection, containerization, characterization,
on-site management, transportation, and off site disposal of all ACMs as
outlined in Table 2 – Confirmed Asbestos-Containing Materials included
in Appendix 2 and identified by the Contractor. The Contractor is
responsible for identifying and verifying quantity of ACMs requiring
removal and disposal. Given the limitations of the pre-renovation survey,
described above, the referenced table is not intended to be a
comprehensive list of all ACM materials potentially present within the
129 Pleasant Street building.
Asbestos Remediation
2
D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and verify the present
location, condition and nature of existing hazards, quantities and types of
materials and/or wastes requiring removal, based on the information provided in
the Contract Bid Documents, attached tables and by a full, complete, and thorough
examination of the Site by the Contractor. The Contractor is required to verify the
quantities of all materials prior, including dimensions and locations of areas
requiring abatement as well as the types of material to be abated.
E. The Contractor is responsible for conducting all OSHA-related safety and
structural investigations for roofing and general conditions within the building
that could pose a hazard to their workers. The Contractor is responsible for all
costs for performing these investigations and corrective measures required to
abate any unsafe conditions and protect workers during abatement activities
F. Contractor shall perform all ACM characterization sampling prior to off-site
transportation as necessary for proper disposal at facilities pre-approved by the
Owner. All waste characterization samples shall be analyzed by an accredited,
Massachusetts Department of Labor Standards (MADLS) licensed laboratory.
The Contractor shall conduct ACM disposal in accordance with ACM
characterization results and these Specifications and all applicable, federal, State,
and local regulations.
G. The Contractor will prepare profiles, manifests, and shipping documents.
Following the submission of all pertinent documentation to the Engineer, the
Contractor shall allow a minimum of 5-days for return of documentation requiring
Owner signature.
H. The Owner shall subcontract the services of a third party project monitor to
perform compliance inspections, post abatement clearance visual inspections and
air clearance testing throughout asbestos removal activities. The Contractor shall
perform personal air monitoring and additional air monitoring in accordance with
MADLS and OSHA requirements that may be required for performance of the
Work.
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Adhere to work practices and procedures set forth in all applicable codes,
regulations, and standards. Conform to City of Northampton, Massachusetts
Department of Environmental Protection (MADEP), MADLS, Massachusetts
Department of Public Health (MADPH), U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(USEPA), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other
State and federal requirements as applicable for ACM removal activities.
B. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS), Subpart
M, National Emission Standard for Asbestos (40 CFR Part 61 §140-147) apply to
the owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity.
Asbestos Remediation
3
C. The United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Title 40, Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 763, Subpart E Asbestos Hazard Emergency
Response Act, (40 CFR Part 763).
D. Obtain, pay all fees, and maintain all necessary permits and notifications from
applicable federal, State and local permits and notifications necessary for
Contractor Work. Provide copies of all permits, notifications and communications
with the City of Northampton, MADEP, MADLS, and MADPH to the Owner.
E. Conform to applicable federal, State and local applicable regulatory procedures
when removing, handling, disposing, or otherwise managing hazardous or
contaminated materials.
1.4 ASBESTOS REMOVAL SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and submit to the General Contractor within 7 days of Notice to Proceed a
project-specific Asbestos Abatement Work Plan in sufficient detail to identify
how the Contractor intends to perform and sequence the Work. The Contractor’s
Asbestos Abatement Work Plan shall, at a minimum, address the following:
1. Methods the Contractor shall use to abate, properly handle, store and
dispose of all ACMs.
2. Necessary permits, notifications, and waivers prior to the start of any
abatement or demolition activities. Copies of all permits, notifications,
and waivers shall be provided to the Owner.
3. Required certification/licensure of Contractor and workers.
4. Coordination of emergency egress and other life safety issues.
5. Coordination to complete lock-out and tag-out of power, air handling
systems, fire protection systems and other equipment and systems to, and
within, the Work Area as needed to complete the work in a safe manner.
6. Sealing of critical barriers to include doorways, windows, heating,
ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) ducts/grills, fixtures, stationary
items and other openings into the Work Area.
7. Complete isolation of Work areas from non-work areas utilizing primary
barriers.
8. Negative pressurization of the Work area with the use of high efficiency
particulate air (HEPA) filtered fan units.
9. Installation of decontamination unit(s) with air lock chambers and
functional shower unit.
Asbestos Remediation
4
10. SDSs for all chemicals and cleaning supplies to be used on-site.
11. Detailed description of removal, enclosure, encapsulation, and cleaning
techniques to be employed.
12. Worker protection including medical surveillance, respiratory protection,
protective clothing and gloves.
13. Decontamination procedures including a cycle of HEPA vacuuming and
wet wiping techniques of all Work area surfaces, materials, equipment and
workers within or exiting the Work area.
14. Procedure for the capture, packaging and proper disposal of all wastewater
and debris generated by the Work.
15. The Contractor shall, at a minimum, provide the following documents as
part of the Asbestos Abatement Work Plan prior to initiation of any
asbestos abatement activities.
a. Copies of personnel training records for each individual associated
with asbestos abatement operations indicating proper training as
required by federal and State regulations.
b. Current state/local certificates and United States Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) certifications for each asbestos worker
and site supervisor.
c. Report of medical examination conducted within last 12 months as
part of compliance with Occupational Health and Safety
Administration (OSHA) medical surveillance requirements for each
worker.
d. A statement that worker is able to wear and use the type of
respiratory protection proposed for the project, and is able to work
safely in an environment capable of producing stress on the
worker.
e. Respirator fit test documentation for each worker and supervisor
wearing respiratory protection.
f. A notarized certification signed by an officer of the Contractor
stating that exposure measurements, medical surveillance, and
worker training records are being kept in conformance with 29
CFR 1926.1101. Certify the dates for primary and secondary
HEPA filter changes for the filtered fan units.
Asbestos Remediation
5
g. Written Respiratory Protection Program as required by OSHA 29
CFR 1910.134 including the selected level of respiratory protection
for each task of this project and any supporting historical air
monitoring data.
16. The Contractor shall submit copies of notifications and permit applications
to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to proceeding with the
Work covered by the permit. Notifications are to be submitted or permits
obtained from the appropriate federal, State and local agency in
accordance with current regulatory requirements. Copies of all permits
and notifications shall be provided to the Owner.
17. Indicate proposed variances from the Specifications.
18. Contractor shall submit in writing names of the proposed Owner approved
disposal facility to be used for ACM. The Contractor shall submit in
writing name of proposed waste hauler including documentation of
applicable permits, insurance, and regulatory status and compliance history
(including documentation of violations and resolution thereof) of hauler
for approval by Owner.
19. Project specific procedures to be used in the management of waste
materials generated during the asbestos removal Work. These procedures
shall outline, at a minimum, the Contractor’s intended methods for
handling, preparing, storing, treating, characterizing, shipping, and
disposing of waste and outline the areas of the Site in which waste
handling activities will occur. This section shall also include a waste
tracking log to be utilized throughout the entire duration of the project to
document all materials transported off-site for disposal and/or recycling.
The waste tracking log shall include, but not be limited to, pertinent
shipping information such as date, time, material, transporter, estimated
quantity/volume, and disposal facility for the material being transported.
B. Contractor shall submit daily waste disposal logs to the General Contractor. Log
shall include date, waste characterization, transporter, disposal facility
identification and location, manifest number, vehicle number, driver, and
approximate volume and/or weight of waste.
C. Contractor shall submit certificate of recycle for materials transported for recycle
to the General Contractor. Certificate shall include date, recycle facility,
identification and location, approximate volume, and/or weight of material and
description of recycle methods.
Asbestos Remediation
6
D. Submit Project Record Documents upon completion of ACM abatement work.
1. Recorded actual quantities of materials removed on a volume and/or mass
basis and provide copies of waste characterization data, profile forms, and
shipping papers.
2. Copies of daily and work area logs including personnel on-site, visitations,
inspections, and testing.
3. Copies of analytical results from sampling completed by the Contractor
during asbestos removal activities.
4. Photographic documentation of Work.
5. Copies of all waste manifests for hazardous waste shipments, bills of
lading for nonhazardous waste shipments, certificates of destruction, and
certificates of recycle for all recycled materials generated during course of
Work.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to perform the Work in accordance with
these publications and all other applicable State, federal, and local laws,
regulations and statutes.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2. ANSI A10.6 (1990) Demolition Operations
3. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
4. 40 CFR 61 – Subpart M – National Emissions Standard for Asbestos
5. 40 CFR 260-282 – Solid Wastes
6. 40 CFR 763 – Subpart E – Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act
7. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134 – Respiratory Protection
8. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1001 – General Industry Standard for Asbestos
9. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.55 – Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, and Mists
10. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.95 – Criteria for PPE
11. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 – Asbestos Construction Standard
12. U.S. Department of Transportation Regulations 49 CFR Parts 172 and 173
13. MADEP Air Quality and Solid Waste Regulations 310 CMR 7.00 and 310
CMR 19.000.
14. MADLS Regulations 452 CMR 6.00; and
15. MADPH State Sanitary Code Chapter II; 105 CMR 410.353.
1.6 TRAINING AND QUALIFICATIONS
A. All workers who work shall be provided training, at a minimum, on the following
topics and in accordance with the requirements of the Site-specific Health and
Safety Plan:
Asbestos Remediation
7
1. Asbestos workers shall have valid MADLS issued asbestos abatement
worker certificate and EPA certified Asbestos Worker training document.
2. The health hazards of asbestos including the nature of asbestos related
diseases, routes of exposure, known dose-response relationships, the
synergistic relationship between asbestos exposure and cigarette smoking,
latency periods, and health basis for standards.
3. Personal protective equipment including the types and characteristics of
respirator classes, limitations of respirators, proper selection, inspection,
donning, use, maintenance and storage of respirators, field testing the face
piece to face seal (positive and negative pressure fit tests), qualitative and
quantitative fit testing procedures, variations between laboratory and field
fit factors, factors that affect respirator fit, selection and use of disposable
clothing, use and handling of washable clothing, non-skid shoes, gloves,
eye protection, and hard hats.
4. Medical monitoring requirements for workers including required and
recommended tests, reasons for medical monitoring and employee access
to records.
5. Air monitoring procedures and requirements for workers including
description of equipment and procedures, reasons for monitoring, types of
samples and current standards with recommended changes.
6. Work practices for ACM removal including purpose, establishment of
regulated areas, proper construction and maintenance of airtight plastic
critical and primary barriers, job set-up of airlocks, posting of warning
signs, engineering controls, electrical and ventilation system lockout,
proper working techniques, waste cleanup, storage and disposal.
7. Personal hygiene including entry and exit procedures for the work area, use
of showers and prohibition of eating, drinking, smoking, and chewing in the
Work area.
8. Special safety hazards that may be encountered including electrical hazards,
air contaminants (carbon monoxide, wetting agents, and encapsulants), fire
and explosion hazards, scaffold and ladder hazards, slippery surfaces,
confined spaces, heat stress, and noise.
9. Workshops allowing both supervisory personnel and abatement workers
the opportunity to observe and experience the construction of containment
barriers and decontamination facilities.
10. Lockout/Tagout and Confined Space Entry procedures.
Asbestos Remediation
8
B. Asbestos Abatement Site Supervisor Qualifications
1. The Contractor shall provide at least one MADLS certified and EPA
accredited asbestos abatement Site Supervisor per work area, whose
responsibilities include coordination, safety, security, and execution of all
phases of the asbestos abatement work. The individual and his/her
qualifications shall be clearly identified in the Contractor’s Asbestos
Abatement Work Plan. The Site Supervisor shall not be used as an asbestos
worker.
2. The asbestos abatement Site Supervisor shall be fully qualified in all aspects
of asbestos removal practices and procedures, and have valid State of
MADLS issued asbestos abatement supervisor certificate and EPA
certified Asbestos Contractor/Supervisor training document. The asbestos
training course shall cover all topics listed above as well as training in
contract specifications, liability insurance and bonding, legal considerations
related to abatement, establishing respiratory protection medical surveillance
programs, EPA and OSHA record-keeping programs, as well as any other
topics requested by the Owner.
3. The certified asbestos Site Supervisor shall be certified in CPR and
Emergency First Aid by an appropriate authority, as well as having received
the required training under the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogen Standard.
4. The Site Supervisor shall be fully qualified and experienced in all aspects of
hazardous waste operations to be conducted as part of this work and shall
have an additional 8 hours of training in managing Hazardous Waste
Operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal Materials and Equipment
B. Cleaning Materials and Equipment
C. Protective Equipment
D. Disposal Bags
E. Drums
F. Disposal Labels and Signs
G. Sheeting and Covering
Asbestos Remediation
9
2.2 REMOVAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall provide new materials and new or used equipment in undamaged and
serviceable condition. Only materials and equipment that are recognized as being suitable
for the intended use, by compliance with appropriate standards, are to be used during the
Work.
A. Fire Extinguishers
The Contractor shall provide multi-purpose ABC minimum rating to A40BC fire
extinguishers. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable recommendations of
NFPA Standard 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." Fire extinguishers
shall be located where they are most convenient and effective for their intended
purpose, but provide not less than one extinguisher inside each Work area in the
equipment room and one outside each Work area in the clean room.
B. Construction Lumber
Construction lumber for critical barrier walls shall consist of nominal, 2" x 4"
framing, 16 inches center to center.
C. Plastic Sheeting
The Contractor shall provide non-combustible, fire-retardant, 4- and 6-mil thick
clear, frosted, or black plastic sheeting in the largest size possible to minimize seams
in accordance with local fire department requirements. The use of spray plastic will
not be allowed.
D. Adhesive Materials
The Contractor shall provide duct tape in 3" widths, with an adhesive that is
formulated to aggressively stick to plastic sheeting. The Contractor may also
provide spray adhesive in aerosol cans that is specifically formulated to stick
tenaciously to plastic sheeting.
E. Shower Assembly
Contractor shall provide a leak tight shower enclosure with integrated drain pan
fabricated from fiberglass or other durable waterproof material, approximately
3' x 3' square with minimum 6' high sides and back. The Contractor shall
structurally support the unit as necessary for stability and equip it with a hose bib,
mounted at approximately 4'-0" above drain pan.
The Contractor shall provide a factory made shower-head producing a spray of
water that can be adjusted for spray size and intensity. The Contractor shall feed
shower with water mixed from hot and cold supply lines, as required by
Asbestos Remediation
10
Commonwealth of Massachusetts regulations, arranged so that control of water
temperature, flow rate, and shutoff is from inside shower without outside aid.
The Contractor shall provide a totally submersible waterproof sump pump with an
integral float switch. The unit shall be sized to pump two times the flow capacity of
all showers or hoses supplying water to the sump, through the filters specified herein
when they are loaded to the extent that replacement is required. The unit shall be
capable of pumping debris, sand, plaster or other materials washed off during
decontamination procedures without damage to mechanism of pump. The
Contractor shall adjust float switch so that a minimum of 3" remains between top of
liquid and top of sump pan. Cascaded filter units shall be installed on drain lines
from showers or any other water source carrying asbestos contaminated water from
the Work Area
F. Negative Air Filtration System
The Contractor shall provide air-filtering equipment capable of filtering particles to
0.3 micrometers at 99.97% efficiency and of sufficient quantity and capacity to
cause a complete air change within the work area at least once every 15 minutes.
Such equipment shall exhaust the filtered air so as to maintain a negative pressure
inside the work area. Air shall flow in through the decontamination unit and
exhaust through the negative air filtration unit by means of flexible duct leading
outside the work area, preferably outside of the building. Negative air filtration
shall be in operation at all times during abatement activities.
G. HEPA Vacuum
The Contractor shall utilize high efficiency filter wet vacuums to filter particles of
0.3 micrometers or larger at 99.97% efficiency or greater. The Contractor shall
obtain HEPA vacuum attachments, such as various size brushes, crevice tools, and
angular tools to be used for varied application, and service the HEPA vacuum
routinely to assure proper operation. Caution shall be used any time the vacuum is
opened for HEPA filter replacement or debris removal. Operators shall wear
protective clothing and respirators or more negative pressure within the Work area
relative to adjacent building areas.
The unit must be equipped with a safety system that prevents it from being operated
with the HEPA filter in an improper orientation when using the HEPA vacuum.
Vacuuming by conventional means is unacceptable.
H. Encapsulant
The Contractor shall provide an owner approved liquid material that can be applied
to surfaces stripped of ACM that controls the release of asbestos fibers (“lock down
encapsulation”) from the material either by creating a membrane over the surface
Asbestos Remediation
11
(bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material and binding its
components together (penetrating encapsulant).
I. Amended Water
For wetting prior to disturbance of asbestos-containing materials, the Contractor
shall use an amended water solution. The Contractor shall provide water to which a
commercial surfactant (i.e., not dish detergent) has been added. The Contractor
shall use a mixture of surfactant and water, which results in wetting of the asbestos-
containing material and retardation of fiber release during disturbance of the
material, equal to or greater than that provided by the use of one ounce of a
surfactant, consisting of 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether
mixed with five gallons of water.
2.2 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Cleaning materials must not include any solvent-based products or any products
which may contaminate or otherwise cause deterioration of the surfaces. Only
water and approved surfactants (if necessary) will be used for cleaning. All
cleaning equipment and materials must be pre-approved by General Contractor
and Owner prior to mobilization and use on-Site.
B. Water shall be clean and potable.
C. All decontamination water must be captured, characterized, and properly disposed
by the Contractor.
D. To collect dust and small debris, vacuums equipped with high efficiency
particulate air (HEPA) filters shall be used as appropriate.
2.3 PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
A. Provide health and safety equipment required to protect workers and to comply
with the Contractor’s Site-specific Health and Safety Plan, OSHA, including 29
CF 1926.1101, and Massachusetts regulations.
2.4 DISPOSAL BAGS
A. Disposal bags: Provide 6 mil (0.15mm) thick leak-tight polyethylene bags with
labels as required by federal, state and local regulations.
2.5 DRUMS
A. Waste disposal drums: Provide DOT 17-H Open – Top Drums (55 gallon) in
accordance with DOT regulation title 49 CFR Parts 173, 178, and 179.
Asbestos Remediation
12
B. Fiberboard Drums of Equivalent: Provide sufficient quantity of polyethylene
lined fiber board drums or equivalent (as determined by Engineer) for packaging
of ACMs with rough edges.
2.6 DISPOSAL LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Provide leak-tight waste bags or containers for disposal of ACMs with labels in
accordance with OSHA, EPA, and the latest revisions to the US Department of
Transportation requirements, not limited to material identification number
(#NA2212), material packaging group (PGIII), and labels. Warning labels will
also include:
Legend: Danger
Contains Asbestos Fibers
Avoid Creating Dust
Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard
In accordance with NESHAPS, label each waste bag with the name of the waste
generator and address where the material was generated. Include the Contractor
name and address on each label also. Attach label in a sufficient manner such that
they are properly sealed to or on the containers.
B. Label all ACM waste bags, containers, and transport vehicles as required by
applicable U.S. Department of Transportation Rules and Regulations.
2.7 SHEETING AND COVERINGS
A. Waterproof sheeting used in the lay-down/segregation area(s), within transport
containers, and/or to cover stockpiles shall be strong, durable, impermeable,
flexible 20 mil (two layers of 10-mil) minimum thickness polyethylene sheeting
or other MADEP approved material. It shall be capable of resisting tears or
punctures due to equipment placement. The sheeting shall be clear, with a
minimum density of 0.926 g/cm3 and a minimum impact strength of 151 grams.
B. Equipment or structural material that is cut and is placed on laydown area that has
liner must be cut and placed such that sharp edges do not tear liner.
C. If during Work, sheeting or covering becomes torn or punctured, Contractor shall
immediately repair or replace damaged sheeting or covering at no additional cost
to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting sheeting or covering
at least once per day to check if repair is needed.
Asbestos Remediation
13
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Asbestos Removal Requirements
B. Asbestos Removal Access Control
C. Asbestos Removal Location Preparation and Removal
D. Housekeeping
E. Quality Control
F. Personal Protection
G. General Waste Handling Procedures
3.2 ASBESTOS REMOVAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Asbestos removal includes proper cleaning, removal, collection, containerization,
characterization, on-site management, transportation, and off site disposal of all
ACMs.
B. Owner is not liable to Contractor for lost Work time due to federal, State, or local
government actions including inspections, data review, Work stoppage, or other
unforeseen actions.
C. Owner is not liable to Contractor for lost Work time due to federal, State, or local
government actions including inspections, data review, Work stoppage, or other
unforeseen actions.
D. If the Contractor encounters undiscovered, encased or suspect ACMs during the
course of the Work other than those identified in this Section, cease work in
affected area only and immediately notify Owner and General Contractor of such
discovery. Do not proceed with Work in such areas until authorized by the
Owner. Continue Work in other areas.
E. The Contractor is responsible for determining the proper removal procedures and
proper disposal of ACMs in accordance with current regulatory requirements.
F. The Contractor is responsible for implementing proper engineering controls for
protection of public, employees, subcontractors, and building occupants or trades
during the Work and to prevent contamination of the buildings outside of the
designated work areas.
Asbestos Remediation
14
G. The Contractor shall conform to building, fire, electrical, environmental, OSHA,
State and local requirements, and all other applicable codes for abatement work,
safety of structure, preservation of property, dust control, disposal of generated
waste materials, etc. The Contractor shall immediately report all accidents or near
miss accidents to the General Contractor.
H. Protect abutting properties and structures, appurtenances, and utilities during
ACM abatement activities. Cease operations immediately if abutting structures
appurtenances, or utilities appear to be in danger, and notify Engineer
immediately. Structures, fencing, and other improvements damaged by
Contractor that are intended to remain shall be repaired or replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
I. Conduct operations with minimum interference to Site access. Maintain Site
egress and access at all times.
J. Access to adjacent properties for Work is not permitted.
3.3 ASBESTOS REMOVAL ACCESS CONTROL
A. The Contractor is responsible for conducting all OSHA-related safety and
structural investigations for roofing and general conditions within the building
that could pose a hazard to their workers. The Contractor is responsible for all
costs for performing these investigations and corrective measures required to
abate any unsafe conditions and protect workers during abatement activities
B. Isolate the Work area to prevent entry by authorized personnel or the public.
Notify the Engineer and General Contractor of all doors and other openings that
must be secured to isolate Work area. Access to stairwells and building exits
must be maintained as indicated by the Owner, Engineer and General Contractor.
C. Arrange access to Work area so that only access into Work area is through
securable doors to personnel and equipment decontamination units.
D. Provide solid construction barriers to prohibit unauthorized access. At a
minimum, provide solid barriers as necessary to isolate all work areas with
abatement activity. At a minimum provide solid barriers as necessary to isolate
all Work areas with removal activity. The Contractor shall report to the General
Contractor and Engineer and immediately repair any damage to barriers. Work
inside the Work area shall stop until all damaged areas are repaired to the
satisfaction of the Owner, General Contractor and Engineer.
E. Make-safe all energized circuits and components in the Work area. The
Contractor is responsible for the complete isolation of any energized circuits in all
removal Work areas. Contractor shall install temporary electrical and water
service as necessary for the completion of abatement activities. Contractor is
responsible for all electrical and water usage charges throughout Site activities.
Asbestos Remediation
15
F. Provide warning signs at each door and barrier leading to the Work area as
follows:
Legend: Danger
Keep Out
Beyond This Point
Construction Work
In Progress
Immediately inside door (leading to Work area) and outside all accessible critical
barriers post a manufactured caution sign, approximately 20-inch by 14-inch,
displaying the following legend with letter sizes and styles of a visibility required
by 29 CFR 1926:
Legend: Danger
Asbestos
Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard
Authorized Personnel Only
Respirators and Protective Clothing Are Required
In This Area
G. The signs shall be posted at the perimeters of asbestos removal, demolition or
construction areas where the asbestos-containing material to be removed exists.
H. The Contractor shall maintain all temporary and critical barriers, facilities and
controls as long as necessary for the safe and proper completion of the work. All
containments shall consist of floors covered with 2 layers of 6-mil poly sheeting and
ceilings and walls covered with 2 layers of 4-mil poly ethylene sheeting, except in
those instances where such surfaces are deemed contaminated or are to be abated.
I. Any breaches in the containment will be corrected at the beginning of each shift and
as necessary during the workday by the Contractor. Work will not be allowed to
commence until all control systems are in place and operable to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and Owner’s third party project monitor.
J. No barriers shall be removed until the work areas are thoroughly cleaned and all
debris has been properly bagged and removed from work areas, and the air has
passed final clearance tests, in accordance with provisions detailed herein.
3.4 ASBESTOS REMOVAL LOCATION PREPARATION AND REMOVAL
A. Area Cleaning And Preparation
1. Pre-clean all work area surfaces using HEPA vacuums and wet wiping
methods. As applicable, detach all electrical and mechanical items, such as
lighting fixtures, clocks, diffusers, registers, escutcheon plates, etc. which
Asbestos Remediation
16
cover any part of the surface to be worked on or which may be impacted
during work. Respiratory protection and protective clothing shall be
required as defined by OSHA regulation 1926.1101. All pre-cleaning shall
be inspected by the Owner’s third party project monitor. During pre-
cleaning activities, the Work area shall have its primary and critical barriers
in place and be under adequate negative pressure as described herein. Do not
complete any work that may result in disturbance to the ACM until all other
work area preparations are completed. Any changes to the pre-cleaning shall
be at the approval of the Asbestos Project Designer and Engineer. It should
be noted that pre-cleaning shall take place in all Work areas prior to
commencement of abatement. Pre-cleaning shall include wet wiping and
HEPA vacuuming of the floor areas and non-movable items. In addition, all
cleanable movable items deemed "contaminated" by the Engineer and
Owner’s third party project monitor shall also be pre-cleaned.
2. All critical barriers to the Work area(s) shall be sealed using two layers of
6-mil fire retardant polyethylene sheeting, covering all openings where
possible airborne fiber migration can occur. This includes, but is not limited
to, windows, doors, vents, HVAC openings, receptacles, holes, floor drains,
shafts, and entry points to the Work area(s), etc. to prevent discharge to the
environment during the course of the work;
3. All wall, ceiling and floor surfaces within removal areas not scheduled for
removal as part of this project shall be covered with fire retardant
polyethylene sheeting. All seams and joints shall be sealed with tape. Wall
and ceiling coverings shall consist of a minimum of two layers of 4-mil
thickness, fire-rated polyethylene sheeting. Floor coverings shall consist of
a minimum of two layers of 6-mil thickness, fire-rated polyethylene
sheeting. Surfaces from which ACMs are being removed are exempt from
this covering requirement;
4. The Contractor shall demarcate the regulated exterior work area with
barrier tape and appropriate asbestos hazard signage, seal openings into the
building adjacent to the work area with critical barriers comprised of two
layers of 6-mil fire-rated polyethylene sheeting. Ground tarps shall be
installed on surfaces under the work area, fastening the tarp to the
foundation 3 feet above the ground surface and extending out from the
foundation 10 feet per every floor of the structure. Louvers, grills, open
pipes, etc. shall be covered from the exterior;
5. The Contractor is responsible for clearing and off-site disposal of trees and
brush over growth around the building within the Limits of Work as
needed to complete the work.
6. The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to ensure that asbestos fibers do
not escape the Work area. The Contractor shall be required to clean all areas
Asbestos Remediation
17
of the ground or other man-lift or platform surfaces where contamination is
observed. Work will cease until cleaning is completed to the satisfaction of
the Owner’s third party project monitor and steps have been initiated to
prevent further contamination; and
7. The Engineer and Owner’s third party project monitor shall conduct an
inspection of the Work area(s) preparations and engineering controls prior to
the Contractor commencing asbestos abatement activities. Such inspections
may include smoke testing potential routes of migration from the Work
area(s).
B. Decontamination Unit And Procedures
1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide a personnel decontamination
unit contiguous to the Work Area consisting of a serial arrangement of
connected rooms or spaces, changing (clean) room, shower room,
equipment room (with associated air-locks). Require all persons without
exception to pass through this decontamination unit for entry into and
exiting from the Work Area for any purpose. Do not allow parallel routes
for entry/ exit. Shower shall be completely functional as described herein.
2. Install air locks between the clean room, shower room, and equipment
room. At a minimum, air-locks must be 24" in length. This shall be
designed to minimize fiber migration and airflow between the
decontamination unit rooms.
3. The rooms shall be constructed out of wood, metal, or plastic supports as
necessary. The units must be completely sealed and water-tight. A
minimum of 2 layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting shall be installed on
all interior walls and floors in the unit. Install black sheeting as necessary
for privacy. Construct each section of the unit with sufficient size to
adequately accommodate decontamination and other work activities.
Provide flap doors separating each section of the unit. Fabricate from two
overlapping sheets with openings a minimum of 3' wide. Configure so
that sheeting overlaps adjacent surfaces. Weigh sheets at bottoms as
required so that they quickly close after being released. One sheet shall be
secured at the top and left side, the other sheet at the top and right side.
Contractor shall provide additional protective coverings as needed to
protect the building surface from water or humidity damage. Provide
water source continuously and during all phases of work.
4. The rooms together shall be referred to as the decontamination unit. A
decontamination unit shall be required for each separate containment area,
if the Work is to be divided into sections.
Asbestos Remediation
18
5. The Equipment Room shall serve as a transfer room for decontamination
procedures to occur in. This room shall be vacuumed and washed at the
end of each work shift and whenever necessary in order to prevent
asbestos dust and debris accumulations. Workers leaving the containment
shall remove and dispose of protective suits and footware in the equipment
room and proceed into the shower room.
6. The shower room shall contain an appropriate number of shower heads
supplied with hot and cold water adjustable at the tap. Uncontaminated
soap, shampoo, and towels shall be available at all times. The shower
water shall be drained, collected, and filtered through a cascaded filter unit
system with water passing through primary filter of 20 microns and output
of primary filter passes through secondary filter of 10 microns and final
filter of at least 5.0-micron particle size collection capability to avoid rapid
clogging of the filtration system by large particles. Filtered wastewater
and contaminated filters shall be disposed of as asbestos waste.
7. The clean room shall store asbestos workers' street clothing, clean
protective clothing, and clean respirator equipment. Do not allow any
asbestos-contaminated material in this room. Access is only from the non-
work area (or non-containment areas) or from the shower room after
complete decontamination. The clean room will serve as an access for
personnel entering the Work area after donning of respiratory protection
and protective clothing and for changing into street clothes after
decontamination.
8. The decontamination enclosure system (load out station) for removing
packaged asbestos waste from the Work area(s) shall consist of an air lock
from the Work area(s) leading into the bag wash and wipe room, and
another air lock leading to outside the Work area(s).
9. The bag wash and wipe room shall be equipped with the facilities to wash
and wipe the outside of the non-porous drums or bags prior to final
packaging and loading waste into transport containers or vehicles. Make
provisions to collect any contaminated run-off and prevent from leaving
the bag wash room.
C. HEPA Filtration
Adequate negative pressure shall be provided within the enclosure as specified
below.
1. After asbestos work area containment preparation is completed, and prior to
commencement of Work, the Engineer and Owner’s third party project
monitor will accompany the Abatement Supervisor to perform a visual
Asbestos Remediation
19
assessment of the work area. This will consist of checking the integrity of
barriers including smoke testing the containment if deemed necessary by the
Engineer and Owner’s third party project monitor. The assessment does not
relieve the Contractor's responsibility to ensure the isolation of the work
area.
The volume of air within the contained work area shall be changed a
minimum of four times per hour. A pressure differential reading
of -0.02 inches of water shall be maintained within the negative pressure
work area relative to surrounding space in the building. Accomplish the
pressure differential by exhausting a sufficient number of HEPA filtered
fan units from the work area. A manometer with a strip chart recorder shall
be used to show that the proper pressure differential is being maintained.
The manometer shall be placed in a location acceptable to the Engineer. No
ACM shall be disturbed until the manometer is installed, is functioning
properly and indicates a negative pressure of -0.02 inches of water column.
All flexible ducting, vent tubing, adapter plates and other equipment used
for the passage of filtered air shall be undamaged, uncontaminated, and free
of air leaks at all points.
2. Provide units with pre-filters and intermediate filters installed either on or
in the intake grid of the unit and held in place with special housings or
clamps. The pre-filter consists of low-efficiency type (e.g., for particles
100 um and larger) filter media and the intermediate filter consists of a
medium efficiency (e.g., effective for particles down to 5 um) filter. Pre-
filters shall be changed frequently during asbestos removal activities.
3. HEPA filtered fan units shall exhaust to the outside of the building. All
HEPA filtered fan units shall be tested on-Site by the Contractor.
4. Air movement shall flow uninterrupted from outside the Work area
through the decontamination unit into the work area. There shall be no
other openings for air to enter the containment unless approved by the
Engineer and Owner’s third party project monitor in writing.
5. HEPA filtered fan units shall be placed as far as possible from the air
intake to the containment to prevent short cycling of fresh air.
6. This containment, along with the decontamination unit, shall constitute the
critical containment of the Work area from the surrounding areas. All
openings to this critical containment are to be sealed except where air must
enter the work area due to the use of exhaust equipment.
Asbestos Remediation
20
7. Unless approved by the Engineer, air shall enter the critical containment
only through the decontamination unit. A pressure differential meter will
be installed and maintained. If pressure differential drops below
0.02 inches of water, stop work until proper negative pressure is restored.
8. Written modifications to these isolation and sealing methods, procedures,
and design may be considered if all elements of proper and safe procedures
to prevent contamination and exposure can be demonstrated.
9. Written modifications to these requirements must be submitted to the
Asbestos Project Designer for review before they can be implemented.
D. Asbestos Removal
1. Asbestos removal shall not begin until the Owner’s third party project
monitor has given authorization to proceed. This authorization will be
given after the removal area has passed a visual inspection by the Owner’s
third party project monitor based on the criteria presented herein. The
Owner and General Contractor reserve the right to inspect the work area at
any time and to order the Contractor to stop Work.
2. During all abatement Work, workers shall wear OSHA-approved and
required safety equipment and clothing.
3. The Contractor shall provide equipment as necessary to gain access to all
interior and exterior ACMs. The Contractor shall provide all training as
appropriate to all workers and supervisors required to operate lifts, ladders,
etc. The Contractor shall provide fall protection training and
OSHA-approved fall protection for all applicable Work.
4. The Contractor is responsible for the demolition of walls, chases, ceilings,
etc. to access all ACMs that may be located within these spaces. The
Contractor may be required to sequence asbestos removal and interior
demolition phases of Work as needed to access ACMs. Should the
Contractor co-mingle non-asbestos building materials with asbestos-
containing or asbestos-contaminated materials, then the Contractor shall
dispose of these materials as asbestos waste at no additional cost to the
Owner.
5. The Contractor is responsible for the removal/disposal of all non-asbestos
coverings or structures required to access asbestos-containing flooring. In
areas where carpet or other coverings are applied directly to floor tiles, the
coverings may be disposed of as construction debris if removed prior to
the disturbance of other ACM in the work area and if the asbestos-
containing floor tiles and floor mastic are not disturbed by removal of the
covering.
Asbestos Remediation
21
6. All asbestos-containing material shall be removed utilizing required
regulated areas, containments and negative air filtration. All materials
shall be sufficiently saturated/wetted with amended water to reduce fiber
release so that the airborne fiber concentration does not exceed the
established OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs). All wastewater
shall be filtered through cascade filter system as described herein before
being disposed.
7. Dry removal shall not be permitted at any time.
8. All asbestos-containing material shall be carefully removed and placed
into double 6-mil polyethylene bag, non-porous 6-mil polyethylene lined
fiber drums, or individually double wrapped with 6-mil polyethylene
sheeting for disposal. All bags, containers or wrapped materials
transported out of the work area shall be cleaned, packaged and labeled
with preprinted labels required by USEPA, OSHA and the Department of
Transportation regulations. The name of the waste generator (Owner) and
the project location address shall also be placed on each bag/drum.
9. Fine cleaning of residual ACM shall consist of carefully scraping and
brushing using wet methods, and wet wiping the material from surfaces.
10. Air testing may be performed outside the regulated asbestos areas by the
Owner’s third party project monitor in accordance with Commonwealth of
Massachusetts regulations. If fiber concentrations exceed 0.010 fibers per
cubic centimeter (fibers/cc), or background levels, Work shall stop and the
Contractor shall perform clean-up activities in the affected areas and check
the integrity of all barriers at no additional cost to Owner or General
Contractor. No Work shall commence until air testing verifies that air
quality levels are acceptable.
11. Clean-up activities shall include, but not be limited to, wet-wiping and
vacuuming surfaces with a HEPA equipped vacuum. Work may continue
only after the source of contamination is identified, corrected, and proper
cleaning activities are implemented.
12. After brushing and scraping, surfaces shall be free of visible debris and
fibers. A final wipe-down of the substrate with wet, lint-free cloths shall
take place in order to ensure proper cleaning. All surfaces including
floors, walls, ceilings, and suspended ceiling grid-work shall also be
HEPA vacuumed clean.
13. All visible ACM is to be removed by the Contractor before encapsulation
procedures are allowed to begin. The Owner’s third party project monitor
will conduct an inspection of the Work area prior to giving approval to
begin encapsulation of the Work area. The removal substrate must be
Asbestos Remediation
22
clean and bare, and the entire Work area must be free and clear of any
suspect material for the Contractor to pass this visual inspection and begin
encapsulation.
E. Encapsulation Procedures
1. The polyethylene barriers shall be cleaned of gross contamination before a
lockdown sealant can be applied to the substrate.
2. After the substrate has been cleaned and all polyethylene barriers of the
Work area are cleaned of all visible debris, the Contractor shall request a
visual inspection of the Work area by the Owner’s third party project
monitor.
3. Workers performing lockdown must wear disposable protective clothing
and respirators suitable for asbestos. The encapsulation process shall not
be treated any differently from the removal process in this respect.
4. All surfaces from which ACMs have been removed shall be encapsulated.
A minimum of one coat of lockdown encapsulant shall be applied to both
the substrate and the polyethylene sheeting serving as the containment
barrier. If the lockdown material is being applied to irregular, grooved, or
corrugated surfaces, it shall be administered from the opposing side, or at a
right angle to the direction of the previous application.
5. The encapsulant shall be left to dry before the commencement of final air
testing. After final clearance and inspection criteria have been met, the
Contractor shall begin final take-down procedures.
F. Removal of Critical Barriers
1. No critical barrier shall be taken down until the final visual inspection is in
compliance and final clearance air tests are found to be below 0.010
fibers/cubic centimeter by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM), NIOSH
7400 Method.
2. After a successful final visual inspection by the Owner’s third party
project monitor, encapsulation, and a successful clearance visual
inspection and final air test, as applicable, the Contractor shall conduct the
post abatement takedown.
3. All encapsulated polyethylene sheeting used in the construction of the
decontamination unit and containment area shall be bagged and disposed
at an Owner approved disposal facility as asbestos-contaminated waste by
the Contractor.
Asbestos Remediation
23
4. Surfaces exposed in the Work area during this process shall be examined
for traces of suspect ACM debris.
5. If any suspect ACM debris is observed, it shall be removed up by HEPA
vacuuming and wet cleaning and a coat of encapsulant shall be applied to
the affected areas. Based on the amount of suspect material found, the
third party project monitor may request the use of misters in the
surrounding area.
6. The Contractor shall then implement the use of misters as a precautionary
measure.
3.5 HOUSEKEEPING
A. Throughout the Work, the Contractor shall maintain the buildings and Site in a
standard of cleanliness as described in these Specifications.
1. Contaminated disposable clothing, respirator filters, and other debris shall
be bagged and sealed at the end of each workday.
2. All asbestos generated by either removal or repair shall be bagged
immediately and not be allowed to be left exposed at the end of each
workday.
3. Respirators shall be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each workday and
stored for the next days use.
4. The Contractor shall retain all stored items in an orderly arrangement
allowing maximum access, not impeding traffic, and providing the
required protection materials.
5. The Contractor shall not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste
material, and other items not required for completion of the Work.
6. The Contractor shall provide adequate storage for all items awaiting
removal from the Site, observing all requirements for fire protection and
protection of the environment.
7. Daily, and more often if necessary, the Contractor shall inspect the Work
areas and adjoining spaces, and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste
material. Remove all such items to the place designated for their storage.
8. The Contractor shall maintain the Site in a neat and orderly condition at all
times.
Asbestos Remediation
24
3.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner shall retain the services of a third party project monitor to provide
monitoring of asbestos removal work practices and performance, inspection of the
Work , bulk fiber identification, personal, perimeter, and clearance air sampling and
analysis, and visual clearance inspections throughout the asbestos abatement work.
The third party project monitor shall be on-Site periodically during all asbestos
abatement related activities.
B. Air Monitoring
1. The air clearance acceptance criteria for this project is 0.010 fibers/cubic
centimeter by PCM. PCM sample analysis shall be available within
24 hours.
2. Background (pre-testing) air samples may be taken to represent conditions
before the Contractor starts masking and sealing operations.
3. During removal, daily area samples may be collected by the Owner’s third
party project monitor outside major openings in the containment, in the
clean room, at other critical points outside the Work areas, just outside the
clean room, inside the contained Work sites, and at HEPA exhaust locations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all OSHA personal sampling. Final
clearance air samples shall be collected by the Owner’s third party project
monitor inside each removal area after acceptance of visual inspection and
encapsulation.
NOTE: Encapsulation on all surfaces (including floor) must be dry prior to
final air sampling.
4. A sufficient number of samples to reliably characterize the air quality shall
be collected. Air shall be agitated by means of a small leaf blower prior to
the test, and kept agitated by means of a small electric fan. The results of all
samples must comply with the requirements set forth in this Section. Failure
to meet the specified criteria will require the Contractor to reclean the
designated work area and then the project monitor to repeat the final air
clearance testing at no additional cost to the Owner. All repeat air testing
shall be the Contractor's financial responsibility. Cleaning and testing will
be repeated until the specified criteria are met, at no additional cost to
Owner or General Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible for
any Owner’s third party project monitor fees associated with the retesting.
Asbestos Remediation
25
C. Work Review
1. The Engineer and Owner’s third party project monitor will review the
Contractor's work practices prior to the start of, and during all asbestos
related work, and will report any violations to the Contractor. If the
Contractor fails to correct deficiencies in a timely manner, the Engineer will
notify the General Contractor and Work may be stopped.
2. The Owner’s third party project monitor will review the containment
structure and negative air conditions before Work begins and after the
Contractor Site Supervisor has given approval.
3. Outside containment and exterior regulated work areas airborne fiber
concentrations must not exceed 0.010 fibers/cc or pre-abatement levels,
whichever is greater.
4. If concentrations exceed this level, then Work must be stopped, conditions
reviewed as to the probable cause, and then corrected by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner. The Owner’s third party project monitor shall
keep a daily log of the Contractor's work practices and shall make these
daily logs a part of the final project documents.
3.7 PERSONAL PROTECTION
A. Respirators and Protective Clothing
1. Protective Clothing
a. Personal protection, in the form of disposable Tyvek suits, and
NIOSH approved respirators, are required for authorized personnel
entering the regulated work area at the work Site during the set-up,
removal, and cleaning operations.
b. The Contractor shall provide all this protective equipment for
workers, supervisors, Owner, project monitor, and authorized
personnel to access the work areas.
c. Each worker shall be supplied with a disposable uniform prior to
each entry to the regulated work area. Under no circumstances will
anyone entering the removal area be allowed to reuse a
contaminated uniform.
d. Work clothes shall consist of disposable full body suits, head
covers, gloves, footwear, and eye protection. Street clothes are
forbidden in the work area at all times even under protective suits.
Asbestos Remediation
26
2. Respiratory Protection
a. The Contractor shall supply workers and supervisory personnel
with NIOSH approved protective respirators and HEPA filtered
cartridges.
b. Appropriate respirator selection shall be determined by the daily
personal samples being taken and strictly follow the guidelines set
forth in the OSHA respiratory program 29 CFR 1910.134. The
respirators shall be sanitized and maintained according to the
manufacturer's specifications. Appropriate respirators shall be
selected using the information provided in OSHA Title 29 CFR
Part 1910.1926 Final Rules.
c. The Contractor will maintain on-Site a sufficient supply of
disposable HEPA filtered cartridges to allow workers and
supervisory personnel to change contaminated cartridges at least
three times daily. The Contractor is solely responsible for means
and methods used and for compliance with applicable regulations.
d. Respirators shall be individually assigned to removal workers for
their exclusive use.
e. All respiratory protection shall be provided to workers in
accordance with the written submitted respiratory protection
program, which includes all items in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134 (b)
(1-11). A copy of this program shall be kept at the on-Site and
shall be posted in the Clean Room of the Decontamination Unit.
f. Workers must perform negative and positive pressure fit tests each
a time a respirator is put on, whenever the respirator design
permits.
g. Workers shall be given a qualitative fit test in accordance with
procedures detailed in the OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1025, Appendix D,
Qualitative Fit Test Protocols, for all respirators to be used on this
project. An appropriately administered quantitative fit test may be
substituted for the qualitative fit test.
h. Upon leaving the active work area, the pre-filter shall be discarded,
cartridges removed, and respirators cleaned in disinfectant solution
and clean water rinse. Clean respirators shall be stored in plastic
bags when not in use. The Contractor shall inspect respirators
daily for broken, missing, or damaged parts.
Asbestos Remediation
27
3. Personal Sampling
a. The Contractor shall provide daily personal sampling to check
personal asbestos exposure levels for the purpose of establishing
respiratory protection needs.
b. Samples shall be taken for the duration of the work shift or for eight
hours, whichever is less.
c. Personal samples need not be taken every day after the first day if
working conditions remain consistent, but must be taken every time
there is a change in the removal operation, either in terms of the
location or the type of work, or during any changes in personnel.
Sampling will be to determine eight-hour Time Weighted Averages
(TWA). The Contractor is responsible for personal sampling as
outlined in OSHA Standard 1926.1101.
d. Sampling personnel shall be proficient in the taking of asbestos air
samples as prescribed by NIOSH 7400, and must be supervised by
an individual who has completed the NIOSH 582, or equivalent,
training course.
e. Asbestos air sampling results shall be available for posting at the job
Site in written form no more than 48 hours after the completion of a
sampling cycle. The document shall list each sample's result,
sampling time and date, individual monitored, flow rate, sampling
duration, microscope field area, number of fibers per fields counted,
cassette size, and analyst's name and company. Air sample analysis
results will be reported in fibers per cubic centimeter.
3.8 GENERAL WASTE HANDLING PROCEDURES
A. Disposal of all wastes generated as a result of Work shall be performed by the
Contractor in accordance with all applicable federal, State, and local regulations.
B. The Contractor shall arrange for all material sampling and transportation of
samples to an accredited, MADLS licensed laboratory to properly characterize
wastes for disposal at facilities pre-approved by the Owner. Contractor shall
segregate each of these material types by hazardous or non-hazardous waste
classification, as determined by results of samples collected. It is Owner's
intention to obtain waste classification of non-hazardous for as much of the waste
as practicable.
Asbestos Remediation
28
C. The Contractor will prepare profiles, manifests, and shipping documents.
Following the submission of all pertinent documentation to the Engineer, the
Contractor shall allow a minimum of 5-days for return of documentation requiring
Owner signature.
D. Waste shall be transferred into DOT-approved containers to be provided by waste
transporter(s) or drums to be provided by Contractor and staged for waste
classification sampling. Asbestos waste containers shall be lined with a minimum
of two layers of 10-mil polyethylene sheeting. Containers shall be DOT
shippable. Shipping containers shall be filled to within legal weight and height
limits for shipping. Waste shall be contained to comply with approved disposal
facility requirements. Contractor is responsible for temporarily staging waste in
an area designated in Contractor’s Asbestos Removal Plan approved by the
General Contractor.
E. Care shall be taken not to overload waste containers. Waste shall be sized, as
necessary, and placed in transport containers to achieve appropriate minimum
densities.
F. Contractor shall coordinate, manage, and pay for (as a part of the bid price) all
waste handling activities with transport firm(s) and with disposal facility(ies)
unless otherwise noted in these Specifications. Waste handling activities shall be
conducted in accordance with approved schedule so as not to delay Work.
G. Contractor shall perform scheduling of all waste shipments, in coordination with
the General Contractor and with the Owner identified as generator. Owner will
sign waste profiles and manifests prepared by the Contractor. Contractor shall
provide waste manifests to Owner to sign 72 hours prior to shipment of waste, and
Owner will in-turn sign manifests in a timely manner. General Contractor will
assist Contractor to coordinate Owner’s signature on waste manifests.
H. Any demurrage costs associated with transportation shall be borne by Contractor.
I. Waste shipments shall be transported directly from the Site to the disposal
facility(ies). No temporary off-site storage of waste materials is permitted.
J. Contractor shall be responsible for transport of all waste to disposal facility(ies)
approved by the Owner unless otherwise noted in these Specifications. Contractor
shall provide weight tickets for all waste disposals, using commercially available
scales with current calibration records.
K. Material shall be contained such that characterization and removal can be
performed efficiently.
L. Maintain daily log of each truck’s weight and all waste shipped off Site.
END OF SECTION
Waste Management and Disposal
1
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description of Work
B. References
C. Submittals
D. Waste Categories
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision for containerization, characterization, on-Site management, transportation, and
incidentals necessary to transport and dispose of all waste generated as a result of
the Work to a facility permitted to accept the waste and approved by the Owner.
Waste includes, but is not limited to asbestos waste, hazardous materials, debris
generated during the Work (i.e., used health and safety equipment, decontamination materials, polyethylene sheeting and decontamination liquids),
and universal waste materials.
B. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all testing necessary to properly
characterize wastes for disposal at the selected, permitted, and Owner-approved
facility in accordance with facility requirements. All waste characterization samples shall be analyzed by to an accredited, Massachusetts Department of
Labor Standards (MADLS) licensed laboratory.
C. Contractor shall segregate each of these material types by hazardous or non-
hazardous waste classification, as determined by results of samples collected. It is
Owner’s intention to obtain waste classification of non-hazardous for as much of the waste as practicable, to recycle whenever possible, and to minimize the
amount of materials disposed of off the Site.
D. The Contractor will prepare final waste profiles, Bills of Lading (BOLs),
manifests, and shipping documents as required per the Owner-approved waste
disposal/recycling facilities. Following the submission of all pertinent documentation to the Engineer, the Contractor shall allow a minimum of 5-days
for return of documentation requiring Owner signature.
E. The Contractor shall arrange for off-Site transportation of all materials to the
Owner-approved facilities and pay all necessary taxes, surcharges, transportation
and tipping fees.
Waste Management and Disposal
2
F. Owner or Owner’s designee will sign all necessary waste profiles and shipping
documents as the Generator.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Regulations contained in Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Parts 1910
and 1926, including amendments as stated in Federal Register, March 6, 1989,
Final Rule, 29 CFR 1910.120, "Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency
Response"
1. United States Environmental Protection Agency Guidance
a. Federal Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, as amended.
b. United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) 40 CFR
268
c. Posted weight limitations on roads and bridges
d. Applicable United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) Analytical Methods
e. Code of Federal Regulations – Protection of the Environment, Sub-
chapter I – Solid Wastes f. 40 CFR 122 National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
Standards
g. 40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste
h. Code of Federal Regulations – Transportation, Sub-chapter B –
Hazardous Materials Transportation and Pipeline Safety
i. 49 CFR 106 Rule-making Procedures
j. 49 CFR 107 Hazardous Materials Program Procedures
k. Code of Federal Regulations – Transportation, Sub-chapter C, Hazardous Materials Regulations
l. 49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and Definitions
m. 49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Tables and Hazardous Materials
Communications Regulations
n. 49 CFR 177 Carriage by Public Highway
Waste Management and Disposal
3
o. 49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packaging
p. 49 CFR 179 Specifications for Tank Cars
q. 49 CFR 180 Continuing Qualification and Maintenance of
Packaging
r. Code of Federal Regulations – National Pollutant Discharge
Elimination System permit
s. Clean Water Act, Section 301 (a)
t. 40 CFR 122.28 Remediation & Miscellaneous Contaminated Sites
General Permit (RGP). See also: http://www.epa.gov/region01/npdes/rgp.html
B. Conform to Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (MADEP)
Air Quality and Solid Waste Regulations 310 CMR 7.00 and 310 CMR 19.000
and other applicable regulatory procedures when removing, handling, disposing,
or otherwise managing hazardous or contaminated materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and submit to Engineer within 7 days of Notice to Proceed, a project-
specific Waste Management and Disposal Plan outlining procedures to be used in
management of waste materials generated during the Work. The Waste
Management and Disposal Plan shall address, at a minimum, the Contractor’s intended methods for characterizing, handling, preparing, storing, treating,
shipping, and disposing of all excess materials and outline the areas of the Site in
which waste handling activities will occur. Contractor shall identify and make
arrangements with all, permitted and Owner-approved off-site reuse, salvage,
recycling, and disposal facilities to be used. The Contractor shall not remove any materials from the Site until the Waste Management and Disposal Plan has been
approved by the Engineer. If, following approval of the Waste Management and
Disposal Plan, the Contractor desires or identifies a need to use any facility not
included in the Plan, the Contractor must submit all the information as required by
this paragraph, and receive approval for same from the Owner, prior to such use. The Waste Management and Disposal Plan shall, at a minimum, contain the
following:
1. Include with Bid, listing of proposed disposal for each anticipated waste
stream. This listing shall also include the anticipated quantity for each of
the proposed facilities. The Contractor shall identify facilities that are permitted to accept these waste streams with their bids for review and
approval by Owner and Engineer. These materials shall be disposed of or
recycled at a facility permitted to accept these waste streams.
Waste Management and Disposal
4
2. Name, title, and telephone number of contact person for each recycling/
disposal facility to be used.
3. Lists matching each facility with the materials it will accept for this
project, and specifying whether the facility is a recycling, treatment, storage, or disposal facility.
4. Confirmation from the facility(ies) that they are permitted to and will
accept the type and quantities of materials.
5. Description of Contractor’s procedures to manage and track materials and
example of Contractor’s material tracking log.
6. Estimated volumes of waste expected to be generated including
demolition debris streams.
7. Hauling company(s) name(s) and address(es).
8. Name, title, and telephone number of contact person for each hauling
company to be used.
B. Upon award, if the Engineer finds that the submitted Waste Management and
Disposal Plan does not comply with specified requirements, the corrective
revisions will be noted on the submittal copy returned to the Contractor.
C. Revisions to the accepted Waste Management and Disposal Plan may be made
only with the written approval of the Engineer. A change affecting the contract value of any activity including the contract time may be made only in accordance
with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.
D. Contractor shall submit daily disposal truck logs to the Engineer. Log shall
include date, waste characterization, transporter, disposal facility identification
and location, bill of lading or manifest number, vehicle number, driver, and approximate volume and/or weight of waste.
E. Contractor shall submit certificate of recycle for materials transported for recycle
to the Engineer. Certificate shall include date, recycle facility, identification and
location, approximate volume and/or weight of material, and description of
recycled methods.
F. Submit the following upon completion of activities.
1. Recorded actual quantities of materials removed on a volume and/or mass
basis and provide copies of profile forms, and shipping papers.
Waste Management and Disposal
5
2. Copies of all waste manifests for hazardous waste shipments, bills of
lading for nonhazardous waste shipments, certificates of destruction, and
certificates of recycle for all recycled materials generated during course of
Work.
1.5 WASTE CATEGORIES
A. The following is a listing of the waste categories anticipated for the Work.
Contractor shall segregate and dispose of all materials based on these categories
and the results of analytical testing required by the Owner-approved receiving
facilities. Contractor shall make every effort to segregate waste streams during
execution of the Work.
1. Asbestos Remediation Waste – materials shall include all building
materials and debris containing or impacted by asbestos, identified on the
Drawings and described in the Specifications, including, but not limited to
all items as outlined in Table No. 2 – Confirmed Asbestos Containing Materials included in Appendix 1 and identified by the Contractor. This
category also includes used PPE and enclosure materials.
2. Hazardous Materials/Universal Waste – materials shall include lead coated
components and generated wastes, and all items as outlined in Table No. 3
– Hazardous Materials Inventory Included in Appendix 1 and identified by the Contractor. This category also includes used PPE and enclosure
materials.
3. Decontamination Liquids – non-hazardous decontamination liquids
generated during the Work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coordination
B. Materials Handling and Off-Site Transportation
C. General Waste Handling and Disposal Procedures
D. Decontamination Fluids
E. Labeling of Waste Containers
Waste Management and Disposal
6
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to sampling for waste characterization
for off site disposal. The Engineer will observe all sampling activities performed
by the Contractor. Any sampling performed without the knowledge of the Engineer must be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Contractor shall coordinate the removal, processing (if applicable), and off site
transportation of all materials and debris with the Engineer.
3.3 MATERIALS HANDLING AND OFF-SITE TRANSPORTATION
A. Contractor shall perform the following tasks for the proper handling of materials that will be transported to the identified Owner-approved off site disposal
facilities:
1. Pack and label materials for transportation following all USEPA,
MADLS, MADEP, US and MADOT regulations and local requirements.
2. Pending the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may transport the material from the Site to the approved recycling/disposal facility in
appropriate containers or trucks.
3. Manage excess liquids in accordance with regulations and disposal facility
requirements governing transportation and disposal.
4. Coordinate and manage the custody of necessary waste profiles, BOLs, hazardous waste manifests, and labels, as required. The Contractor will
prepare final waste profiles and shipping documents for signature by the
Owner as the Generator. Following the submission of all pertinent
documentation to the Engineer, the Contractor shall allow a minimum of
5 days for return of documentation requiring Owner signature.
5. Engage a licensed transporter.
3.4 GENERAL WASTE HANDLING AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all testing necessary to properly
characterize wastes for disposal at the selected Owner approved facility.
Contractor shall segregate each of these material types by hazardous or non-hazardous waste classification, as determined by results of samples collected.
It is Owner’s intention to obtain waste classification of non-hazardous for as
much of the waste as practicable, to recycle whenever possible, and to minimize
the amount of materials disposed of off the Site.
Waste Management and Disposal
7
B. All characterization sampling of waste for disposal or for potential recycling and
reuse shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with all applicable
federal, state, and local regulations and individual waste transporters and disposal
facility requirements.
C. Waste shall be transported in lined and covered DOT-approved containers to be
provided by waste transporter(s) or drums to be provided by Contractor and
staged for waste classification sampling. Containers shall meet all US DOT
shipping requirements. Shipping containers shall be filled to within legal weight
and height limits for shipping. Waste shall be contained to comply with all approved disposal facility requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for
temporarily staging stored waste in an area designated in the Owner approved on-
Site area.
D. Asbestos transport containers shall be lined with a minimum two layers of 10-mil
polyethylene sheeting. Asbestos transport containers shall be fully enclosed, placarded and lockable.
E. Care should be taken not to overload waste containers. Debris shall be sized, as
necessary, and placed in transport containers to achieve appropriate minimum
densities.
F. All demolition debris stockpiles comprised of material capable of becoming airborne or generating dust shall be covered with plastic sheeting at all times.
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining plastic sheeting on stockpiles or
transport containers.
G. The Contractor shall coordinate, manage, and pay for (as a part of the bid price)
all waste handling activities including transportation to the approved receiving facilities.
H. Contractor shall schedule all waste shipments, in coordination with the Engineer,
and with the Owner identified as generator.
I. Any demurrage costs and taxes associated with transportation shall be borne by
Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
J. Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of all waste to Owner -approved
disposal facilities unless otherwise noted in these Specifications. Contractor shall
provide weight tickets for all waste disposal using commercially available scales
with current calibration records. Portable scales will not be permitted for
determination of pay quantities. Failure to properly weigh and record wastes transported for disposal will result in non-payment by the Owner.
K. The Contractor shall maintain a daily log of each truck’s weight and all waste
shipped off the Site.
Waste Management and Disposal
8
L. All solid waste material, containment system components, used personal
protective equipment and any additional media generated during the work (which
will not be decontaminated), shall be placed directly in appropriate waste
receptacles immediately upon removal from its in-situ position. Suitable waste receptacles may consist of lined, enclosed roll-off containers or DOT-approved
55-gallon drums, and shall be supplied by the Contractor.
M. If roll-off containers are to be utilized for containerization of Universal Waste
Work wastes, the following shall apply:
1. All roll-off containers or similar vessels utilized shall be watertight and lined with 10-mil polyethylene sheeting or equivalent impermeable lining,
and equipped with a secured, lockable, and impermeable cover.
2. The impermeable cover shall remain securely in place at all times when
material is not being actively placed in the vessels. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the cover remains securely intact and locked until the container is removed from the Site.
N. If 55-gallon drums are to be utilized for waste containerization, the drums shall
consist of suitable DOT-approved 55-gallon drums that are watertight and free of
corrosion, perforations, punctures, or other damage. All drums shall be securely covered and sealed at the conclusion of each work day. All drums shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of this Section and meet the
following specifications.
1. Waste disposal drums: Provide DOT 17-H Open – Top Drums (55 gallon)
in accordance with DOT regulation title 49 CFR Parts 173, 178, and 179.
2. Fiberboard Drums or Equivalent: Provide sufficient quantity of fiber
board drums or equivalent (as determined by Engineer) for packaging of
ACMs with rough edges.
O. Disposal bags and wraps to be utilized shall be 6 mil (0.15mm) thick leak-tight polyethylene bags.
P. A waste staging area shall be designated by the Contractor prior to initiation of
Work, and approved by Engineer.
3.5 SCRAP STEEL HANDLING PROCEDURES
A. Scrap steel shall be transported to a steel processor for smelting and a certificate
of destruction/recycling provided.
Waste Management and Disposal
9
B. Recycle/salvage of all scrap steel generated as a result of Work shall be in
accordance with all applicable federal, State, and local regulations.
C. Contractor shall perform characterization of all scrap steel as necessary for
recycle. This may consist of additional lead-containing paint analysis if required
by the steel management company.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for managing any scrap steel that contain lead-
containing paint that is in poor condition and is not acceptable for recycle. Any
lead-based paint debris and lead-containing waste shall be characterized and
properly disposed. All lead-containing paint management must be performed in
accordance with applicable federal, State, and local regulations.
3.6 LIQUID WASTE MATERIAL AND DECONTAMINATION FLUIDS
A. Under no circumstances shall decontamination fluids or liquid waste be
discharged to the ground surface or subsurface at the Site.
B. Liquid materials, including equipment or personal decontamination fluids or
similar liquids generated during work at the Site shall be placed directly into
appropriately sized and sealed vessels, supplied by the Contractor.
C. Acceptable vessels for the storage of liquid waste may include DOT-approved
55-gallon drums or steel or polyethylene tanks. All proposed vessels shall be
compatible with the intended liquid contents.
D. All storage vessels to be used in the containerization and transportation of liquid
waste materials shall be free of corrosion, perforations, punctures or other
conditions that may impair its ability to securely contain liquid.
E. All liquid storage vessels utilized and staged at the Site shall be stored in an area
on the property that will not interfere with normal flow of vehicle or pedestrian
traffic, and in a manner that will minimize the potential for tipping, vandalism or
damage by vehicular traffic.
F. Disposal of all liquid waste generated at the Site during Work activities shall be a proper waste treatment/disposal facility that is pre-approved by Owner.
Waste Management and Disposal
10
3.7 LABELING OF WASTE CONTAINERS
A. All waste containers must be labeled with the name of the waste contained; the
date in which the first material was placed in the vessel; and the last date at which
addition of waste occurred.
B. All waste containers containing hazardous waste generated during the Work shall
be labeled as follows:
1. HAZARDOUS WASTE-Federal law prohibits improper disposal
If found, contact nearest police or public safety authority or
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Generator’s Name:_________________________
Manifest Document No:_____________________
Such marking must be durable, in English and printed on or affixed to the
surface of the package or label, tag or sign; displayed on a background of sharply contrasting color; unobscured by labels or attachments and located
away from any other marking (such as advertising) that could substantially
reduce its effectiveness.
C. Provide leak-tight waste bags or containers for disposal of ACMs with labels in accordance with OSHA, EPA, and the latest revisions to the US Department of
Transportation requirements, not limited to material identification number
(#NA2212), material packaging group (PGIII), and labels. Warning labels will
also include:
Legend: Danger Contains Asbestos Fibers
Avoid Creating Dust
Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard
In accordance with NESHAPS, label each waste bag with the name of the waste generator and address where the material was generated. Include the Contractor
name and address on each label also. Attach label in a sufficient manner such that
they are properly sealed to or on the containers.
D. Label all ACM waste bags, containers, and transport vehicles as required by
applicable U.S. Department of Transportation Rules and Regulations.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
TABLE 1
SUSPECT ACM SAMPLE INVENTORY
HAP Housing
129 Pleasant Street
Northampton, Massachusetts
04.0190438.00
Page 1 of 3
SAMPLE NUMBER MATERIAL DESCRIPTION MATERIAL LOCATION ANALYTICAL RESULTS
032316B-01 2'x4' Suspended ceiling tile, white Pinhole and indent pattern 2nd Floor, north staircase, utility closet NAD
032316B-01B 2'x4' Suspended ceiling tile, white Pinhole and indent pattern 1st Floor, community room NAD
032316B-02 2'x4' Suspended ceiling tile, white Large pinhole and indent pattern 1st Floor, corridor, north NAD
032316B-02B 2'x4' Suspended ceiling tile, white Large pinhole and indent pattern 2nd Floor, corridor, south NAD
032316B-03 9"x9" Floor tile, green mottle 1st Floor, manager's office 3% Chrysotile
032316B-03B 9"x9" Floor tile, green mottle 2nd Floor, Unit 28 NA/PS
032316B-04 Mastic, black 1st Floor, manager's office, below B03 5% Chrysotile
032316B-04B Mastic, black 2nd Floor, Unit 28, below B03B NA/PS
032316B-05 9"x9" Floor tile, beige mottle 1st Floor, manager's office NAD
032316B-05B 9"x9" Floor tile, beige mottle 2nd Floor, Unit 40 NAD
032316B-06 12"x12" Floor tile, gray mottle 1st Floor, central staircase, landing (level with 1st floor)NAD
032316B-06B 12"x12" Floor tile, gray mottle 1st Floor, central staircase, landing (level with main entrance)NAD
032316B-07 Mastic, black 1st Floor, central staircase, landing, below B06 5% Chrysotile
032316B-07B Mastic, black 1st Floor, central staircase, landing, below B06B NA/PS
032316B-08 12"x12" Floor tile, gray mottle 1st Floor, Unit 2 NAD
032316B-08B 12"x12" Floor tile, gray mottle 2nd Floor, Unit 33 NAD
032316B-09 Mastic, yellow 1st Floor, Unit 2, below B08 NAD
032316B-09B Mastic, yellow 2nd Floor, Unit 33, below B08B NAD
032316B-10 12"x12" Floor tile, beige mottle 1st Floor, Unit 4 NAD
032316B-10B 12"x12" Floor tile, beige mottle 2nd Floor, Unit 32 NAD
032316B-11 Mastic, yellow 1st Floor, Unit 4, below B10 NAD
032316-B11B Mastic, yellow 2nd Floor, Unit 32, below B10B NAD
032316-B12 Gypsum wallboard, brown-white 1st Floor, central staircase, west wall NAD
032316-B12B Gypsum wallboard, brown-white 2nd Floor, north staircase, center wall NAD
032316-B13 Wall paper, brown 1st Floor, central staircase, west wall, on B12 NAD
032316-B13B Wall paper, brown 2nd Floor, north staircase, center wall, on B12B NAD
032316-B14 Staircase tread, red mottle 1st Floor, central staircase NAD
032316-B14B Staircase tread, red mottle 2nd Floor, north staircase NAD
032316-B15 Mastic, brown 1st Floor, central staircase, below B14 2% Chrysotile
032316-B15B Mastic, brown 2nd Floor, north staircase, below B14B NA/PS
032316-B16 9"x9" Floor tile, red mottle North staircase, mid-landing, north NAD
032316-B16B 9"x9" Floor tile, red mottle North staircase, mid-landing, south NAD
032316-B17 Mastic, yellow North staircase, mid-landing, north, below B16 NAD
032316-B17B Mastic, yellow North staircase, mid-landing, south, below B16B NAD
032316-B18 Floor paper, black North staircase, mid-landing, north, below B17 NAD
032316-B18B Floor paper, black North staircase, mid-landing, south, below B17B NAD
032316-B19 Mastic, brown North staircase, mid-landing, north, below B18 NAD
032316-B19B Mastic, brown North staircase, mid-landing, south, below B18B NAD
032316-B20 3" Covebase, brown 1st Floor, north staircase NAD
032316-B20B 3" Covebase, brown 2nd Floor, north staircase NAD
032316-B21 Cove base mastic, brown 1st Floor, north staircase, under B20 Trace Chrysotile
P:\04Jobs\0190400s\04.0190438.00\Report\Tables\Table 1 - Suspect ACM Sample Summary\
Table 1 - ACM Sample Inventory.DGOxlsx.xlsx GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc.
TABLE 1
SUSPECT ACM SAMPLE INVENTORY
HAP Housing
129 Pleasant Street
Northampton, Massachusetts
04.0190438.00
Page 2 of 3
SAMPLE NUMBER MATERIAL DESCRIPTION MATERIAL LOCATION ANALYTICAL RESULTS
032316-B21B Cove base mastic, brown 2nd Floor, north staircase, B20B 2% Chrysotile
032316-B22 9"x9" Floor tile, brown with white streaks Basement, central staircase, landing 3% Chrysotile
032316-B22B 9"x9" Floor tile, brown with white streaks 1st Floor, Unit 8 NA/PS
032316-B23 Mastic, black Basement, central staircase, landing, below B22 5% Chrysotile
032316-B23B Mastic, black 1st Floor, Unit 8, below B22B NA/PS
032316-B24 Window caulk, white 2nd Floor, north staircase, east wall NAD
032316-B24B Window caulk, white 1st Floor, community room NAD
032316-B25 Corrugated paper, brown Basement, Unit M, west wall NAD
032316-B25B Corrugated paper, brown 2nd Floor, Unit 34, south wall NAD
032316-B26 12"x12" Floor tile, tan-brown 1st Floor, Unit 1 NAD
032316-B26B 12"x12" Floor tile, tan-brown 1st Floor, Unit 1 NAD
032316-B27 Adhesive, brown Basement, Unit N, north, under wood wall panel 3% Chrysotile
032316-B27B Adhesive, brown Basement, Unit N, south, under wood wall panel NA/PS
032316-B28 Gypsum board, gray Basement, Unit F, west wall NAD
032316-B28B Gypsum board, gray Basement, Unit D, east wall NAD
032316-B29 Joint compound, white Basement, Unit F, on B28 2% Chrysotile
032316-B29B Joint compound, white Basement, Unit D, on B28B NA/PS
032316-B30 6" Covebase, tan Basement, Unit M NAD
032316-B30B 6" Covebase, tan Basement, Unit M NAD
032316-B31 Mastic, tan Basement, Unit M, under B30 NAD
032316-B31B Mastic, tan Basement, Unit M, under B30B NAD
032316-B32 Sheet flooring, gray, with faux tile pattern Basement, laundry, north NAD
032316-B32B Sheet flooring, gray, with faux tile pattern Basement, laundry, south NAD
032316-B33 Paper backing, gray Basement, laundry, north Associated with B32 NAD
032316-B33B Paper backing, gray Basement, laundry, south Associated with 32B NAD
032316-B34 Mastic, tan Basement, laundry, north, below B32 NAD
032316-B34B Mastic, tan Basement, laundry, south, below B32B NAD
032316-B35 Sheet flooring, white and brown, with random square pattern 1st Floor, women's bathroom, north 30% Chrysotile
032316-B35B Sheet flooring, white and brown, with random square pattern 1st Floor, women's bathroom, central NA/PS
032316-B36 Paper backing, gray 1st Floor, women's bathroom, north Associated with B35 NA/PS*
032316-B36B Paper backing, gray 1st Floor, women's bathroom, central Associated with B35B NA/PS*
032316-B37 Sheet flooring, gray, with random stone pattern 1st Floor, kitchen, north 40% Chrysotile
032316-B37B Sheet flooring, gray, with random stone pattern 1st Floor, kitchen, south NA/PS
032316-B38 Paper backing, gray 1st Floor, kitchen, north Associated with B37 NA/PS*
032316-B38B Paper backing, gray 1st Floor, kitchen, south Associated with B37B NA/PS*
032316-B39 Mastic, tan 1st Floor, kitchen, north, below B37 5% Chrysotile
032316-B39B Mastic, tan 1st Floor, kitchen, south, below B37B NA/PS
032316-B40 Residual mastic, brown 1st Floor, kitchen, north, below B39 2% Chrysotile
032316-B40B Residual mastic, brown 1st Floor, kitchen, south, below B39B NA/PS
032316-B41 Sheet flooring, orange, with random square pattern 2nd Floor, men's bathroom 50% Chrysotile
032316-B41B Sheet flooring, orange, with random square pattern 1st Floor, men's bathroom NA/PS
P:\04Jobs\0190400s\04.0190438.00\Report\Tables\Table 1 - Suspect ACM Sample Summary\
Table 1 - ACM Sample Inventory.DGOxlsx.xlsx GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc.
TABLE 1
SUSPECT ACM SAMPLE INVENTORY
HAP Housing
129 Pleasant Street
Northampton, Massachusetts
04.0190438.00
Page 3 of 3
SAMPLE NUMBER MATERIAL DESCRIPTION MATERIAL LOCATION ANALYTICAL RESULTS
032316-B42 Paper backing, gray 2nd Floor, men's bathroom Associated with B41 NA/PS*
032316-B42B Paper backing, gray 1st Floor, men's bathroom Associated with B41B NA/PS*
032316-B43 Sheet flooring, gray, with black dots 2nd Floor, men's bathroom NAD
032316-B43B Sheet flooring, gray, with black dots 1st Floor, men's bathroom NAD
032316-B44 Paper backing, gray 2nd Floor, men's bathroom Associated with B43 NAD
032316-B44B Paper backing, gray 1st Floor, men's bathroom Associated with B43B NAD
032316-B45 Door caulk, white Basement, north staircase, east door frame 15% Chrysotile
032316-B45B Door caulk, white Basement, north staircase, west door frame NA/PS
032316-B46 Brick mortar, gray Exterior, west side, at main entrance NAD
032316-B46B Brick mortar, gray Exterior, south side, adjacent to fire escape NAD
032316-B47 Foundation sealant, black Exterior, east wall 12% Chrysotile
032316-B47B Foundation sealant, black Exterior, west wall NA/PS
032316-B48 Caulk, white Exterior, east wall, decorative metal panel below northernmost window NAD
032316-B48B Caulk, white Exterior, west wall, decorative metal panel below southernmost window NAD
032316-B49 Window caulk, white Exterior, east wall, below northernmost window NAD
032316-B49B Window caulk, white Exterior, west wall, below southernmost window NAD
032316-B50 Door caulk, white Exterior, south entrance NAD
032316-B50B Door caulk, white Exterior, main entrance NAD
NOTES:
NAD No Asbestos Detected
NA/PS Sample Not Analyzed Due To Positive Stop
* Sample not analyzed at laboratory discretion as material was determined to integral to the sheet flooring material. See analytical report for details.
P:\04Jobs\0190400s\04.0190438.00\Report\Tables\Table 1 - Suspect ACM Sample Summary\
Table 1 - ACM Sample Inventory.DGOxlsx.xlsx GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc.
TABLE 2
CONFIRMED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL RESULTS
HAP Housing
129 Pleasant Street
Northampton, Massachusetts
04.0190438.00
Page 1 of 1
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION MATERIAL LOCATION PERCENT/TYPE
ASBESTOS
USEPA
CATEGORY CONDITION
Joint compound, white Associated with gray gypsum
wallboard Basement: Units B, D, E, F, M and 17 2% Chrysotile RACM Good 4,000 SF
2nd Floor: maintenance closet, north staircase
maintenance closet, and Units 22, 23, 26-31, and 40 2,000 SF
1st Floor: Manager's office, and Units 3, 5, 7, 8, 10-13, 16,
18S, 18N, and 20 3,000 SF
1st Floor: Unit 20 2 SF
Basement: Units A, C, D, E, J, K, N, O and corridor 2,500 SF
Sheet flooring, white and brown with, random square
pattern and backing paper 1st Floor: women's bathroom 30% Chrysotile Category I Good 50 SF
Sheet flooring, gray, with random stone pattern and
backing paper 1st Floor: kitchen 40% Chrysotile Category I Good 75 SF
2nd Floor: men's bathroom 100 SF
1st Floor: men's bathroom 100 SF
2nd Floor: maintenance closet, north stairway
maintenance closet, and units 21, 22, 23, 26-31, 33, 39, 40
and 42
3,000 SF
1st Floor: office, units 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 10-13, 16, 18S, 18N, and
20, and central staircase landing 3,000 SF
Basement: units A, C, D, E, J, K, L, N, O, corridor and
central staircase landing 3,000 SF
Mastic, tan 1st Floor: kitchen 5% Chrysotile Category I Good 75 SF
Residual mastic, brown 1st Floor: kitchen 2% Chrysotile Category I Damaged 75 SF
Stair tread mastic, brown North and central staircases 2% Chrysotile Category I Good 1,500 SF
Cove base mastic, brown North and central staircases 2% Chrysotile Category II Good 750 LF
Wood panel adhesive, brown Basement: Unit N and corridor 3% Chrysotile Category II Good 2,000 SF
Door caulk, white Basement: north corridor door to north staircase 15% Chrysotile Category I Good 20 LF
Foundation sealant, black Exterior, foundation walls, below grade 12% Chrysotile Category I Good 3,300 SF
Roofing Materials Exterior, roof Assumed ACM Category I Good 4,500 SF
NOTES:
1 LF = Linear Feet, SF = Square Feet
5% Chrysotile Category I Damaged
9"x9" Floor tile, green mottle 3% Chrysotile Category I Damaged
ESTIMATED
QUANTITY
This summary includes the location, material type, and approximate quantities of accessible asbestos identified in the site building. Quantities of materials were assessed by a non-calibrated wheeled
tape measure or visual estimation and should be considered as approximate values. It should be noted that these are only estimates, and are based on limited visual observations of accessible areas of
the site.
2 RACM: Includes materials that, when dry, may be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure
3 Category I Non-friable: Includes asbestos-containing packings, gaskets, asphaltic roofing products, resilient flooring, pliable sealants and mastics
4 Category II Non-friable: Includes any non-friable materials other than Category I materials that contain more than 1% asbestos
Mastic, black
Good
Sheet flooring, orange, with random square pattern
and backing paper 50% Chrysotile Category I Good
9"x9" Floor tile, brown, with white streaks 3% Chrysotile Category I
P:\04Jobs\0190400s\04.0190438.00\Report\Tables\Table 2 - Confirmed ACM Summary\
Table 2 Confirmed ACM Summary.DGOxls.xls GZA GeoEnvironmental, Inc.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 1
SECTION 064020
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Interior frames and jambs.
3. Wood casework.
4. Plastic-laminate casework.
5. Plastic-laminate countertops.
6. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
7. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
2. Section 125720 - KITCHEN CASEWORK for premanufactured casework.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified, including casework hardware and
accessories, and finishing materials and processes.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
a. Provide schedule of blocking required to support the Work of this Section.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 2
2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, electrical
components and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long for
each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-
finished woodwork.
a. Submit step-type range sample sets of factory finished plywood and factory
finished solid wood in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish, including
edge banding detail and any veneer or solid edge glue joints.
b. Submit one leaf for every 1000 gross square foot of veneer required.
3. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 5 inches wide by 12 inches
long for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2
of exposed surface finished.
4. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.
5. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1
sample applied to core material, and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for
production of interior architectural woodwork with blueprint-matched wood veneers and
components.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards," latest edition, including errata, for grades of interior architectural
woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated,
provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined
by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be
concealed from view after installation.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 3
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1. The HVAC systems as specified elsewhere may not provide for humidity controls. The
expected ranges of relative humidity are expected to be as high as 55% to a low of
uncontrolled during the heating system. Comply with AWS Section 2, Care and Storage.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards" for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Wood Veneers and Lumber: Provide AWI Custom Grade materials and workmanship, unless
otherwise indicated. For species not listed in the AWS comply with the following:
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 4
1. Provide AWI Lumber Grade 1 and AWI Grade A Veneer, book-matched, minimum 6 inch
face veneer width. Kiln dry to 6-8 percent moisture content. Components shall be free of
defects and sapwood. Match adjacent pieces for color and grain pattern.
2. Single-Source Requirement for Wood Veneers and Solids: Intent is to provide wood
which matches as closely as possible throughout the project. Provide wood veneers and
solids from the same distributor, and from the same flitches and solids sources to the
greatest extent possible.
C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: As selected by the Architect.
1. Architect’s control samples for transparent finish, veneer grain and figure characteristics
are available for review at the office of the Architect.
2. Veneer Matching Requirements:
a. Matching Between Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match and architectural end
match.
b. Matching Within Individual Panel Faces: Balance and Center Match.
c. Method of Matching Panels: Blueprint-matched panels and components.
D. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
E. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide products
with recycled content.
2. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
containing no added urea formaldehyde.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay (MDO).
6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no added urea formaldehyde.
a. Resin impregnated paper backs are not permitted. Backs shall be of compatible
hardwood species and cut. Contact adhesive is not permitted.
F. High-Pressure Decorative Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not
indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Abet Laminati, Inc.
b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc.
c. Formica Corporation.
d. Lamin-Art, Inc.
e. Nevamar Company; a division of Panolam Industries.
f. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 5
G. Solid-Surfacing Material, Quartz-Agglomerate Type: Solid sheets consisting of quartz
aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS-1
and ISSFA-2.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. CaesarStone.
b. Cosentino USA; Silestone.
c. Dal-Tile; ONE Quartz Surfaces.
d. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company; Zodiaq.
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified.
1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from
untreated materials.
3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.
Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment
type:
1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and
drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from
drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated
woodwork.
3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per
ASTM E 84.
1. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide five ply construction with
crossbands to prevent any ammonia fuming from the core to the face veneers.
2.3 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide casework hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
casework, except for items specified in Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 6
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602,100 degrees of
opening, self-closing.
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.
E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 or
BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.
F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091; side mounted and extending under bottom edge of
drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated-steel with steel ball-bearings; of the following grades:
1. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1.
2. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100.
3. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2.
4. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1.
5. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100.
G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: Molded-plastic grommets and matching
plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
2. Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized: BHMA 628.
K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 7
2. Contact Adhesives: Not permitted on the Project without Architect’s prior approval.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
B. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
1. Corners of Casework and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species and Cut: As specified hereinabove.
1. Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching each
face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width or thickness.
E. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
F. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
2.7 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 8
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
2.8 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species and Cut: As specified hereinabove
C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
D. Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs Where Indicated: Products fabricated from fire-retardant
particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and
listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Fire Rating: 20 minutes.
2.9 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
2.10 WOOD CASEWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. AWI Type of Casework Construction: Flush overlay.
C. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: As specified hereinabove.
1. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
3. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match.
4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Running match.
5. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide casework veneers in each room or other space
from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced
set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain.
D. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed
surfaces, stained to match.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for
exposed surfaces.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 9
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
2.11 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CASEWORK
A. Grade: Custom.
B. AWI Type of Casework Construction: Flush overlay.
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Edges: Grade HGS.
D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness,
matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL.
F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range.
2.12 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Custom.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Edge Treatment: As indicated.
E. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 10
F. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop
substrate.
2.13 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of
solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1. As indicated on the Finish Schedule.
C. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-
material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication,
and finishing.
1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.
2. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.
D. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.
2.14 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for factory
finishing.
1. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only
final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
panels.
C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for opaque-finished
items specified to be field finished. Refer to Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for
material and application requirements.
D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system,
staining, and sheen with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1. Grade: Same as item to be finished.
2. AWS Finish System 5: Water white conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-
grain wood before staining and finishing.
5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 11
6. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.
7. Effect: Partially filled pore.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
H. Casework: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
155 Pleasant St PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
Revised June 16, 2016
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064020 - 12
1. Install casework with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of casework with transparent finish.
I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base casework or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints
smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from
a straight line.
3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches and to walls
with adhesive.
4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 079200 -
JOINT SEALANTS.
J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 1
SECTION 27000
LOW VOLTAGE CABELING
PART I-GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The objective of this and related specification documents is to define a universal and
structured communications cable plant infrastructure for use on this project. The goal of such
a cable plant is to accommodate all current and anticipated voice and data systems with little
or no modification, thus reducing administration and maintenance demand for resources.
B. The cable plant standards address a range of typical work and living areas found. The areas include
one-bedroom and studio apartments, fixed offices, open office furniture systems, conference rooms and
all support spaces. This document specifies the design and installation for the station outlets, station
cabling, communication support rooms, equipment rooms, backbone cabling and the service
provider company and access provider company entrance facilities.
C. This document does not specify the communications equipment such as the network hubs,
routers, telephone switch and servers. However, the interface between such equipment and
the cable plant is defined herein.
D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and to all Division 27
Sections.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. - Grounding & Bonding for Communications
Systems B. - Hangers and Supports for
Communications Systems C. - Boxes for
Communications Systems
D. - Ladder racks for Communications Systems the MDF and IDF’s
E. - Identification for Communications Systems
F. - Communications Equipment Room Fittings G. - Communications Backbone Cabling
H. - Communications Horizontal Cabling
I. - Communication Connecting Cords, Devices & Adapters
J. - Audio-visual System
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. This Infrastructure Standard is based on the TIA-568-C Series - Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standards, and TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, along with others noted below. These
documents are published by the Telecommunications Industry Association.
B. The design, cable and component selection, and installation practices shall conform with the
following:
1. TIAlEIA-526-7: Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable
Plant
2. TIA-526-14-B: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant; IEC
61280-4-1 edition 2, Fiber-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part 4-1:
Installed cable plant- Multimode attenuation measurement.
3. ANSIfTIA-568-C-series: Generic and Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards.
4. ANSIfTIA-569-B: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 2
5. ANSIfTIA_-606-A: Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings.
6. ANSI-J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
7. TIA-758-A: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard.
8. TIAlEIA-862: Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard for Commercial Buildings
9. TIA-942: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards for Data Centers
10. TIA-1005: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises
11. TIA-1152: Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
12. Federal Communications Commission Title 47 I FCC Part 15, FCC Part 68
13. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3, 802.5, 802.11
14. National Electrical Code Article 770 "Optical Fiber Cables" and Article 800 "Communications
Circuits"
15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
16. Local Electrical Code
17. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 National Electrical Code
18. NFPA 75 Protection of Electrical Computer Data Processing Equipment
19. OSHA 10 Safety Standards
20. Applicable Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Listings and Approvals
21. UL 444 Communications Cables
22. National, state and local health, safety and building codes
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following definitions are specific to the communications environment and shall apply to this
document and its companion sections for clarification and direction.
1. Contractor: The Communications Contractor or sub-contractors responsible for installation,
termination, test and documentation of communications cabling, termination components,
pathway hardware, telecommunications equipment room hardware and related components
detailed in the technical sections of this Division of work.
2. Communications Cable Plant: All communications cabling, wiring, termination hardware, racks,
cabinets, labeling and all other associated hardware.
3. Communications Outlet: The device used to terminate station cables in couplers or connectors at
user locations. It is the interface between the Station Cable and the end user's equipment.
4. Horizontal (Station) Cabling: The portion of the communication link that connects the
Communications Outlet to the MDF or IDF. It is typically run horizontally on the same floor in a star
topology emanating from the MDF or IDF.
5. Outlet ID: A unique alpha-numeric identification used for referencing a communications outlet.
The Outlet ID is a subset of the Cable ID.
6. Cable ID: A unique, alpha-numeric identification used for tagging the station cables, the jacks within a
communications outlet and the termination blocks or patch panels.
7. 110-Block: References throughout this document to a llO-Block signify a 100-pair llO-block
that is 4 rows high by 25-pair positions (Le. 6 x 4-pair UTP cables) wide or a 300-pair 110 block that is 12
rows high by 25-pair positions (Le. 6 x 4-pair UTP cables or 1 x 25-pair cable) wide
regardless of manufacturer or mounting type, unless otherwise noted.
8. Station Field: 8-position, 8-conductor Modular (8P8C; "RJ-45") termination panel used at the
MDF or IDF to distribute the station cables to the Station Outlets.
9. Backbone Cabling: The portion of the communication link that connects each IDF with the
Data Center, Telecommunications Equipment Room or Entrance Facility or MDF. The Backbone
cabling is typically run vertically in a star topology emanating from the Data Center,
Telecommunications Equipment Room (MDF) or Entrance Facility to all IDF’s. Backbone cabling
consists of both copper and fiber cables.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 3
10. Copper Backbone Field: RJ-45 style termination panel or 11O-Block used to terminate
backbone cabling in the Data Center, MDF or Telecommunications Data Equipment Room,
Entrance Facility or IDF.
11. Fiber Backbone Field: Fiber Optic Patch Panels used to terminate backbone cabling in the Data
Center, Telecommunications Equipment Room, Entrance Facility or MDF.
12. Data Equipment Field: The area in a 19" rack that contains the active equipment that makes up the
local area network. This equipment could be made up of hubs, switches or other active
hardware.
13. The MDF: A room that serves as the distribution point of station cabling to the surrounding area
referred to as the MDF Zone. The MDF also houses all the terminations of station and backbone
cabling as well as network, voice, security and other active equipment.
14. MDF or IDF Zone: An area served by a Telecommunications Room. All Station Cabling from outlets in
a MDF or IDF Zone originate from that MDF or IDF.
15. Entrance Facility (EF): The room where the telephone Company point-of-demarcation
(DEMARC) is installed or originates from their public facilities. This is the service hand-off point or
the point of origin for extending the DEMARC to other rooms within the building.
16. Permanent (Cable) Link: Includes the Communications Outlet, station cable and termination
at the MDF or IDF’s.
17. Channel: Same as Basic Link, but also includes patch cords at the Communications Outlet and in
the MDF or IDF.
18. Cross-Connect: Group of connection points, wall or rack mounted, used to mechanically
terminate and administer building wiring.
19. Zone Cabling: A cabling plan, typically used in an open office area, which provides for a
reconfigurable link between the horizontal cross-connect or interconnect (e.g. at the IDF’s or MDF)
and the work area I user. An intermediate connection point is positioned close to the workstations
served.
20. Consolidation Point: In a Zone Cabling system, an intermediate connection point between the
permanently installed cabling extending from the horizontal cross-connect or interconnect, and moveable
horizontal cabling extending to the Telecommunications Outlet.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. The following abbreviations and acronyms shall apply to this document and its companion sections
for clarification and direction.
8P8C
AFF
ANSI
ATM
AWG
BAS
CDDI
cm
CM
CMP
CMR
dB
DTMF
EIA
EF
EIDF
Eight Position, Eight Conductor modular Jack. Often referred to as an "RJ-45".
Above Finished Floor
American National Standard Institute
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
American Wire Gauge Building
Automation System
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 4
Fiber Distributed Data Interface over Copper
centimeters
Communications cable rated for general purpose use
Communications cable rated for use in plenum areas
Communications cable rated for use in risers and vertical runs
Decibel
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
Electronic Industries Association
Entrance Facility
Equipment Intermediate Distribution Facility
ELFEXT Equal-Level Far-End Cross Talk (pair-to-pair) FCC
FDDI ft.
FIUTP
TR
HCP
IEEE
in.
kg.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
lbs. LAN
m mm
Mbps
MDF MHz
!lm
N
NEXT
OFNP
OFNR
OTDR
PBX
pF
Federal Communications Commission
Fiber Distributed Data Interface feet
Foiled Unshielded Twisted Pair
No shielding around individual pairs and an overall foil shield under the cable jacket
Telecommunications Room
Horizontal Connection Point
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers inch
kilogram
Pounds
Local Area Network
meters
millimeters
Megabits per second
Main Distribution Frame
Mega Hertz (lE6 Hz)
Micrometer or micron (lOE-6 meter)
Newton
Near End Cross Talk
Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum Optical
Fiber Nonconductive Riser Optical Time
Domain Reflectometer
Private Branch Exchange (Telephone Switch) Pico
Farad (lOE-12 Farad)
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 5
PSNEXT Power Sum Near End Cross Talk
PVC RU
TIA
TR USOC
Polyvinyl Chloride
Rack Unit (1.75 inches) Telecommunications
Industry Association
Telecommunications Room
U
T
P
W
A
N
1.6 WORK BY VISION VOICE & DATA SOLUTIONS UNDER A SEPARATE
CONTRACT WITH THE OWNER
Unshielded Twisted
Pair Wide Area
Network
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. As a part of this contract with the Owner, Western Builders will subBeldencontract to provide:
1. Active electronics for interface with building voice and data cabling systems.
2. The telephone system & connections from telephone/data equipment to Contractor provided cabling.
3. Connections between Backbone and Horizontal Cabling.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for cabling and equipment provided under this Section:
1. Note that for satisfying submittal requirements, "Product Data" is usually more
appropriate than true "Shop Drawings" as usually defined. However, expression "Shop
Drawings" is generally used throughout specification.
B. Refer to Belden Warranted Solution Standards for general guidelines on product or installation
information to be submitted.
C. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items submitted.
D. Include proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated in
specification and shown on drawings.
E. When manufacturer's reference numbers are different from those specified, provide correct
cross-reference number for each item. Submittals shall be clearly marked and noted accordingly.
F. When equipment and items specified include accessories, parts and additional items under
one designation, submittals shall be complete and include required components.
G. Submittals should be grouped to include complete documentation of related systems,
products and accessories in a single submittal. Where applicable, dimensions shall be marked
in units to match those specified.
H. Submittals shall be in electronic form (Adobe Acrobat PDF) or paper.
1. Paper documents shall be original catalog sheets or photocopies thereof.
2. Facsimile (fax) sheets shall not be used by contractors.
1. Where submittals cover products containing potentially hazardous non-metallic materials,
Vision shall include "Material Safety Data Sheet" (MSDS) from manufacturer stating physical
and chemical properties of components and precautionary considerations required.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 6
J. Upon request by the owner or engineer, the contractor shall submit one 2-foot section of each
cable type from cable reels sent to the site for Engineer's final approval. This two-foot section
shall have manufacturer's cable markings visible.
K. Contractor shall submit a floor plan outlet labeling spreadsheet indicating the Communications
Outlet ill for each communications outlet.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1. Refer to Section 27 05 53, Identification for Communications Systems, for description of
Communications Outlet ID.
a. Floor plan outlet labeling drawings shall be provided, in Adobe Acrobat.
2. Drawings shall be submitted a minimum of four (4) weeks prior to substantial completion of the work
associated with the corresponding outlets.
3. Packaging: Material and equipment manufacturers shall demonstrate efforts to reduce
packaging waste and/or to use environmentally-preferable packaging materials. Examples include, but
are not limited to, the following: 1) reusable and/or returnable pallets or crates; 2)
FSC-certified wood or salvaged wood pallets or crates; 3) high recycled-content cardboard,
paper, steel, or plastic packaging; and 4) bio-based foam packing materials.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cable and component manufacturer(s) shall be a company specializing in communications cable,
accessories and/or equipment with minimum of 5 years documented experience in
producing cable, accessories and/or equipment similar to those specified herein providing a
warranted solution approved by cable manufacturer.
B. The Contractor shall have been in this business for minimum of 5 years and completed three
(3) projects equal in magnitude to the project specified in the following sections.
C. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary certifications to provide for the Warranty as
specified herein.
1. The Contractor shall be an active participant in the Installers Program operated by the Manufacturer
of the Cabling and/or Termination Components used. The Contractor shall be a participant in this
program at the time of Bidding and remain so throughout the project.
2. Upon request, the Certified Installer(s) assigned to the Project shall be identified to the
Engineer.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. This Article is applicable to all Division 27 Sections. B.
Refer to Division 1 General Provisions.
C. Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections which detail the requirements for each
subsection, the Contractor shall warranty non manufacturer materials, equipment, etc. for a
minimum of one (1) year from date of substantial completion of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE-STOPPING
A. Mineral-fiber stopping materials that are exposed to supply or return air plenums or that are located
above suspended ceilings will be encapsulated or fully sealed to prevent direct exposure of the mineral
fibers to the plenum. Where sealants are used to encapsulate the mineral fiber materials (e.g. smoke
sealants used at perimeter fire-stopping joints) the sealants shall meet the requirements Section,
assuming there is one.
B. All mineral wool products shall contain minimum 75% combined post-consumer and post- industrial
recycled content and shall be documented in accordance with the "Sustainable Design and Construction",
Section assuming there is one.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 7
A. Refer to the individual technical specification sections for detailed Cable Routing and Installation,
Testing and Documentation requirements. The following apply to all communications cabling and
termination work.
3.2 CABLE ROUTING- GENERAL
A. Backbone cables should be routed separately from other building services so as to protect the cabling
from unnecessary abuse. Separate conduit or a telecommunications riser shaft is recommended when it
is deemed feasible.
B. When redundant riser paths are available, the backbone cables should be run in the two different
paths to provide backup in the case of damage to one of the cables. The size of each redundant cable
should be half of the typical single backbone run, so that the total strand/pair count of the two cables is
equal to the total strands/pairs required for the MDF.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. The contractor shall furnish all required installation tools to facilitate cable pulling without damage
to cable jacket.
B. All routing shall be kept clear of other trades work and supported using the method(s)
detailed in the pertinent technical section(s).
C. During pulling operation an adequate number of workers shall be present to allow cable observation
at all points of raceway entry and exit, as well as to feed cable and operate pulling
machinery.
D. Pull cables in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Pull all cable by hand unless installation conditions require mechanical assistance.
1. Where mechanical assistance is used, ensure that maximum tensile load for cable is not exceeded.
This may be in the form of continuous monitoring of pulling tension, use of "break-
away" or other approved method.
F. All cables shall be installed splice-free unless otherwise specified. G.
Avoid abrasion and other damage to cables during installation.
H. Cable manufacturers recommended pulling tensions shall not be exceeded. I.
Pulling lubricant may be used and shall:
1. Be non-injurious to cable jacket and other materials used.
2. Not harden or become adhesive with age.
J. Minimum bend radii, as specified by the manufacturer, must be adhered to for cable pulling and final
installation.
1. Any cables bent or kinked to radius less than recommended dimension are not
allowed and shall be replaced at no expense to Owner.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION - GENERAL
K. Repair damage to interior spaces caused by installation of cable, raceway or other hardware. Repairs
must match preexisting color and finish of walls, floors and ceilings.
L. Replace contractor-damaged ceiling tiles to match color, size, style and texture.
M. Pull cord (200 lb minimum) shall be installed with cable installed in conduit or innerduct. N.
Cabling shall be neatly laced, dressed and supported.
O. In a high-rise environment, provisions must be made to support the backbone cable passing
vertically through the building. The cables should be supported on each floor using an industry approve
support method.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 8
3.4 TESTING
A. Tests shall be optionally conducted by the contractor during the course of construction when
identifiable portions) of installation are complete. Alternatively, testing can be conducted after entire
installation is complete if this does not delay the project schedule.
B. Prior to testing, the contractor shall submit a written description of the intended test
procedures and submit sample test forms to the Engineer or owner.
1. The submitted information shall include the proposed file naming format to be used in
identifying the balanced twisted-pair cable (by 4-pair unit or pair), or optical fiber (by pair or strand)
which is the subject of the test record.
2. Failure to provide the above information shall be grounds for the Engineer or the Owner to
reject any and all Documentation of Results on related testing and to require a repeat of the affected
test.
C. Prior to testing, the contractor shall submit to the owner (or owners representative) and the Engineer,
a proposed schedule for acceptance testing. This notification shall be a minimum of five (5) working
days in advance to allow for witnessing of the tests by a duly authorized
representative:.
D. The Contractor is responsible for supplying all equipment and personnel necessary to conduct
the acceptance tests.
E. Testing shall be completed and accepted by Owner and Engineer before Owner furnished
equipment and cross connects are installed. F.
All tests shall be documented.
G. Test results shall be submitted in the native software of the field test measurement device,
within ten (10) working days of the completion of each testing phase (e.g. subsystem, cable type, area,
floor, etc.) or no later than three (3) weeks prior to the scheduled occupancy of the subject area,
whichever
is earlier.
1. Interim documentation of Test Results in the native software of the field test measurement
device shall be submitted in electronic form on CD-ROM for review and
distribution.
H. Test results in the native software of the field test measurement device shall also be part of the Final
Documentation package submitted by the Contractor on the project.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall provide System Documentation to the
Engineer for approval. Documentation shall include:
1. Test Results
2. Record Drawings
3. Copies of all approved submittals indicating products used in the installation.
4. Phone numbers, physical addresses and Internet/webpage (URL) of local parts suppliers and service
companies covering the products installed.
B. Submit four (4) copies of all required documentation.
C. Documentation of Test Results shall be submitted in electronic form on CD-ROM for review and
distribution.
1. Test results shall be submitted in the format(s) native to the test instrument(s) used in
performing the testing.
2. Where unique software (other than an MS-Word™ compatible Word Processor or MS-
Excel™ spreadsheet) is required for viewing of the test results, the Contractor shall provide along with
the above documentation, three (3) licensed copies of such software. The software
shall run on a MICROSOFT Windows-based personal computer supplied by the Owner.
D. Final Documentation shall be submitted no later than three (3) weeks prior to the scheduled
occupancy of the subject area. This is inclusive of all Test Results and draft Record Drawings.
1. Draft drawings may include mark-ups done by hand.
2. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall be submitted within thirty (30)
working days of the completion of each testing phase.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 9
E. The Engineer or Owner may request that a 10% random field re-test be conducted on the cable
system - at no additional cost - to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those defined
above and in the technical sections. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the
Contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the Engineer or
Owner, including a 100% re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. All documentation - including hard copy and electronic forms of all Test Data and Record
Drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 10
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO GROUND AND BOND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This Section details product and execution requirements for Communications Grounding and
Bonding.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this and
other Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References and
Standards.
B. In addition, the following apply:
1. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment
2. UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
3. ANSI J-STD-607-A - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
4. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) -2008
5. ANSIlNECAlBICSI-607-2011 Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and
Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which provides information on
Definitions and Abbreviations used in this and related Sections. B.
Additional definitions (per referenced standards):
1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB): busbar placed in convenient and
accessible location and bonded by means of bonding conductor for telecommunications to
building service equipment (power) ground.
2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB): interface to building telecommunications
grounding system generally located in telecommunications room. Common point of connection
for telecommunications system and equipment bonding to ground, and located in
telecommunications room or equipment room.
3. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT): conductor that interconnects
telecommunications bonding infrastructure to building's service equipment (power) ground.
4. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB): conductor that interconnects
telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) to telecommunications grounding
busbar (TGB).
5. Grounding Equalizer (GE): conductor that interconnects elements of
telecommunications grounding infrastructure.
6. Exothermic Weld: method of permanently bonding two metals together by controlled
heat reaction resulting in molecular bond.
7. Irreversible Compression: permanent mechanical bond between conductors or
conductor and connector using mechanical or hydraulic tool.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product or
installation information to be submitted by Contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the Project.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 11
1.8 GUARANTEE
A. Refer to Division 1, "General Conditions", and "General Requirements" - Guarantee
Documents for general warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BUSBARS
A. Material: Copper (aluminum not permitted)
1. 1/4" thick
B. Pre-drilled
1. Holes for use with standard sized two hole lugs
2. Hole spacing per ANSI Joint Standard J-STD-607-A.
3. Hole pattern shall accommodate two-hole lugs.
C. Insulators and stand-off brackets shall electrically isolate busbar from wall or other mounting surface.
D. Busbars shall be listed by nationally recognized testing laboratory.
E. Size:
1. Telecommunications Main Ground Busbar (TMGB) - 20" x 4" (minimum). Harger part number
GBI4420TMGB
2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) - 12" x 2" (minimum). Harger part number
GBI14212TGB
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Material: Stranded copper (aluminum not permitted). B.
Bonding Conductors shall be insulated.
1. Green Jacket or Black Jacket marked with Green Tape or Green adhesive labels per NEC
Guidelines.
2. Insulation shall be rated for the environment where it is installed. C.
Size:
1. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) to building's servIce equipment
(power) ground:
a. No. 3/0 AWG
2. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB; TMGB to TGB):
a. Up to 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 2/0
b. Greater-than 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 3/0
3. Grounding Equalizer (GE):
a. Up to 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 2/0
b. Greater-than 20-meters (66-feet) - No. 3/0
2.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Mechanical Connectors
Connector Body shall:
1. Be high-strength, high-conductivity cast copper alloy
2. Be sized to accommodate standard two hole lugs
3. Bolts, nuts, washers and lock-washers: Silicon Bronze or Stainless Steel
4. Shall be supplied as part of connector body
5. Split bolt connector types are not allowed
Connector shall:
6. Meet or exceed UL 467
7. Be clearly marked with catalog number, conductor size and manufacturer. B.
Compression Connectors
Connector Body: pure wrought copper.
1. Conductivity shall be no less than 99% by IACS Standards.
Connector shall:
1. Be. Listed by a NRTL
2. Be of IEEE 837, latest revision.
3. Be factory filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 12
4. Be clearly marked with manufacturer, catalog number, conductor size and
required compression tool settings.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 13
5. Connection shall be irreversible.
6. Compression lugs shall be two-hole, long barrel, electro tin-plated with
inspection ports (Harger GECLB Series)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Permanently attach communications grounds prior to energizing communications equipment.
3.2 TOPOLOGY
A. Refer to the project drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide required elements and miscellaneous hardware necessary to establish
Telecommunication Bonding and Grounding infrastructure as specified. B.
Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install Compression Connectors with compression tool and die system, as recommended by
manufacturer of connectors.
C. Bonding and Grounding connections shall be tight and made with UL listed bonding and
grounding devices, fittings, bushings, etc.
D. On the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT), Telecommunications Bonding
Backbone (TBB) and Grounding Equalizer (GE) all connections shall be Compression type. E.
Locate TGBs and TMGB per drawings.
1. Coordinate TMGB location and BCT routing with Owner.
F. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) shall be continuous and not interrupted by
Telecommunications Grounding Busbars (TGB).
1. TGBs shall be bonded to TEB via tap off of TBE.
2. Exception is "last" TGB on TEB (e.g., furthest from TMGB).
3. Grounding Equalizer(s) (GE) shall connect to TGBs to be interconnected. G.
Insulate Busbars from their support.
H. Structural Steel Framed Structures
1. In structural steel frame buildings, where the steel framework is accessible within the room, the
TMGB and each TGB shall be bonded to the structural steel frame using a minimum No. 6
AWG conductor.
2. Connections to the structural steel shall be by exothermically welding or with an electro tin-
plated bonding plate.
3. Where the structural steel is external to the room and is accessible, the structural steel should
be bonded to the TMGB or the TGB using a minimum No.6 AWG conductor.
1. Connections shall be bare metal to bare metal contact.
1. Clean surfaces of paint, dirt, oil, etc.
2. Apply anti-oxidant materials to both surfaces prior to installation. Harger part number
HCAJC8
J. Connections shall be exposed and visible for inspection at all times.
1. Do not install insulation over bonding connections.
K. Terminate each bonding conductor on its own terminal lug.
1. Multiple conductors on single lug not permitted.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect bonding and grounding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper
installation.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 14
3.5 TESTING
A. Test impedance to earth ground at TMGB and TGBs.
B. Maximum allowable impedance to earth ground shall be 5 Ohms.
1. Correct system installation if measured impedance is higher than maximum allowable and retest to
verify impedance.
3.6 DOCUMENTATION
A. Accurately record locations of grounding electrode(s), busbars (e.g., TMGB, TGBs) and bonding
conductors for telecommunications (BCT).
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 15
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes product and execution requirements for items unique to communications and
not included in Division 26 Sections.
B. Refer to Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems - Part 1 for requirements for Standards,
Submittals, Quality Assurance, Delivery, Storage, Handling, and
Guarantee for Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components for raceway and conduit.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related sections in this and other
Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems". C. Reference
1. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including
the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and section sunder Division 01 General
Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Anchors, Nuts, Washers, and Bolts: Plated.
Mounting, Attachment, and Anchoring Hardware: Corrosion resistant.
Refer to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" - Part 2 for products identified in Part 1 of
this section.
Support Channel: Steel, electrostatically coated with zinc; or fiberglass or pre-galvanized (silver)
or black powder coat.
Threaded Rod: 112-inch in diameter by 13 threads per inch or 3/8-inch in diameter by 11 threads per inch zinc-
plated rod in various lengths.
Steel ladder rack or wire basket tray, 12-inch, 18-inch and 24-inch wide by 10' long pieces;
PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Threaded Rod Type to Be Used
1. Install the following types of threaded rod where required:
a. Unistrut-Type Support Channels: 1/2 inch in diameter by 13 threads per inch. b. Equipment Racks:
5/8 inch in diameter by 11 threads per inch.
2.1
A. B.
C.
D. E.
2.2 J-TYPE CABLE SUPPORT HOOKS
A. Cable support hooks shall be a wide-base type for use in a non-continuous pathway. B. Hooks shall be Galvanized
metal for smooth cable pull and corrosion resistance.
C. Hooks shall:
1. Comply with UL, CUL, NEC and TIA requirements for structured cabling systems.
2. Provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to limit cable bending per cable manufacturers'
recommendations.
3. Have flared edges to prevent damage while installing cables.
4. Should include an integrated cable retention clip
5. Be capable of being installed in a single- or multiple-hook ("tree") configuration. D. The use of "strap" or
"flexible" type cable supports shall not be permitted.
E. Hooks shall be 4 inch base diameter
F. Acceptable manufacturer: CADDY (ERICO)
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" - Part 3 for general installation guidelines.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting
items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these
requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both
communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting
with minimum interference with other items in the
vicinity.
E. Mount ladder type runway above equipment racks and attached to walls perpendicularly and vertically. Attach to
equipment racks using 6" stand-offs.
F. Fasten hanger rods, threaded rods, conduit clamps, and pull boxes to building
structure using precast insert system, expansion anchors, beam clamps, and/or spring steel clips.
G. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; steel
expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete
surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs. Do not use double-sided adhesive tapes.
H. Independently support all raceways and cable trays from structural members only. Do not fasten
raceway supports to pipe hangers or rods, piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, electrical
equipment, or raceway.
1. Under no circumstances are structural steel members to be drilled or welded without written
permission from the principle structural Engineer and Owner.
I. Fabricate raceway and cable runway supports, such as ceiling trapeze, from structural steel or
steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with
spring lock washers under all nuts. Attach raceway and cable tray to support structure
using appropriate strap or clamp hardware.
K. Do not fasten raceways with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for
temporary raceway support during construction, before wire and cable are pulled.
L. Securely attach backboards, enclosures, and cabinets to wall or floor with a minimum of four
anchors:
1. Install material and trim plumb.
2. Anchor surface-mounted enclosures using structural supports at each corner.
3. Provide accessory feet for freestanding equipment cabinets.
M. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support recessed mounted enclosures in stud walls.
N. Use fiberglass or special coated metallic supports in areas subject to corrosives.
O. Support cable runway and multiple raceways adjacent to each other by ceiling trapeze.
P. Support individual raceways by wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze; fastened by wood
screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, expansion shields on concrete or
brick, and machine screws or welded thread studs on steelwork.
Q. Do not use nails anywhere or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry as a base for raceway or
box fastenings. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use
wire in lieu of straps or hangers.
R. The use of "bridle rings" shall not be permitted.
3.2 I-Type Cable Support Hooks
A. Where installed free-air above suspended ceiling or below raised floor, support cables using J-hook
type cable supports installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements.
B. Support hooks from structure. Do not support from ceiling pencil rod, black iron, ceiling grid, conduit,
ductwork, pipe or other trades work.
C. Space I-hook cable supports every 4 ft or in accordance with cable manufacturer's
specifications, whichever distance is shorter.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 17
D. I-hook fill capacities shall be per manufacturer's recommendations and shall consider diameter
of cable type(s) being installed.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2 I-Type Cable Support Hooks
E. 3.3
A. J-hook fill capacities shall be based on initially installed quantity of cable plus 50%.
FIRESTOPPING
Apply fire-stopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Fire- stopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire-stopping."
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART I-
GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes product and execution requirements for items unique to
communications and
not included in Division 26 Sections.
B. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 1 for
requirements for
Standards, Submittals, Quality Assurance, DeliverylStoragelHandling, and Guarantee for:
1. Metal Conduit and Tubing
2. Surface Raceways
3. Outlet and Device Boxes
4. Pull and Junction Boxes.
5. Floor Boxes
6. Handholes and Boxes for Exterior Underground Wiring
7. Sleeves for Raceways I Sleeve Seals
8. Poke Through Fittings
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
B. Related sections in other Divisions of Work:
1. Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems".
1.3 REFERENCE
A. The Work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and sections under Division 01 General Requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 19
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 2 for
products identified in Part 1 of this Section.
2.2 OUTLET BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Minimum outlet box size shall be 4 inches (minimum) square by 2 1/8 inches deep
with single-gang trim ring (device cover), unless noted otherwise on drawings. Total
depth of the assembly including the trim ring shall not be less than 2 1/2 inches.
2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Size Communications Pull Boxes per TIA-569-B "Commercial Building Standard
for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces" as detailed below, unless noted
otherwise on drawings.
B. Where a pull box is used with raceway(s) smaller than 11,4" trade size, minimum
junction box size
shall be 4 11/16" square by 2 1/8 inches deep, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
C. Where pull box is used with raceway(s) of 1%" trade size or larger, pull box shall:
1. for straight pull through, have a length of at least 8-times trade-size diameter of
largest raceway;
2. for angle and U pulls:
a. have a distance between each raceway entry inside box and opposite wall ofbox of at least
6-times trade-size diameter of largest raceway, this distance being increased by
sum of trade-size diameters of other raceways on same wall of box; and
b. have a distance between nearest edges of each raceway entry enclosing same conductor of
at least (1) six times trade-size diameter of raceway; or (2) six times trade-size
diameter of larger raceway if they are of different sizes.
c. for a raceway entering wall of a pull box opposite to a removable cover, have a distance from
wall to cover of not less than trade-size diameter of largest raceway plus 6-times
diameter of largest conductor.
2.4 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Minimum communications raceway size shall be 1 inch, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
A. Manufacturers: Carlon, Pyramid.
B. Size innerduct for maximum 40% fill (cable vs. innerduct LD.). Minimum innerduct
duct size shall be 1-1/4 inch (LD.) unless otherwise noted on drawings.
C. Indoor Innerduct shall be:
1. Corrugated.
2. Rated
a. Riser where installed in a vertical path defined as a "Riser" by applicable Codes
SECTION 27 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
2.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
b. Plenum where installed in a return-air plenum
D. Innerduct color shall be as follows:
1. Riser: ORANGE
2. Plenum: ORANGE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCTS COMMON WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" - Part 3 for Outlet
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 20
Boxes for general installation requirements
3.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Spacing for Pull and Junction Boxes for Communications shall be as follows.
Separate lengths with
pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where
necessary to comply with these requirements.
1. I-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 100 feet.
2. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of
raceway unless
Drawings show stricter requirements.
B. Provide Communications Pull Boxes on straight section of raceway.
1. Do not use Pull Boxes in place of bends in raceway unless shown on
drawings. C. Provide Communications Pull Boxes wherever there is a
reverse bend in run.
3.3 OUTLET BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Provide communications outlet boxes for each communications outlet or as
noted on drawings.
3.4 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS:
A. Provide one conduit from each communications outlet box. Horizontal conduit runs
between outlet
boxes are not allowed.
1. Terminate conduit above closest accessible ceiling.
a. Where no suspended ceiling is present, extend conduit to suspended ceiling.
2. Provide insulated bushings on all raceways.
3.5 FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC INNERDUCT
A. Flexible Non-metallic Innerduct (e.g. "Innerduct") shall be used as follows:
1. To segment conduits, thereby increasing their capacity.
2. As protection to backbone fiber optic cables installed in cable tray or Cable Support Hooks.
.
SECTION 27 -IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for labeling of
communications cabling, termination components, pathways and spaces.
B. All Backbone and Horizontal Cables, Communications Outlets and Termination components
(e.g. Copper and Fiber Optic Patch Panels) shall be clearly labeled by the Contractor to
identify them as unique throughout the project.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification
sections in this and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent
References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 21
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for
product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
B. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall provide samples of all label types planned
for the project.
These samples shall include examples of the lettering to be used and shall follow the standards
detailed below.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance requirements
for the project.
2.1 GENERAL
A. Labels shall be machine generated and be permanent.
B. No hand written or non permanent labels allowed unless specifically noted otherwise.
C. All labels and markings shall be physically and chemically resistant to damage that
would make the label unreadable.
D. Characters on all labels shall be Black printed on a background of contrasting color.
E. Labels shall match the Communications Outlet layout and Patch Panel design and
shall be as large as practicable (up to 16-point) to fit properly.
1. No lettering shall be smaller than lO-point.
F. Cable labels shall be self-laminating, White / Transparent Vinyl and incorporate an
integrated clear lamination which, when the label is wrapped around the cable, covers the
printed part of
the label.
1. Labels shall be of adequate size to accommodate the circumference of the cable(s)
being marked and properly self-laminate over the full extent of the printed area of the
label.
2. Labels used on larger cables (e.g. Copper Backbone) may be wrapped with clear non-
removable tape.
G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All cables, termination equipment and hardware shall be labeled in accordance with TIA
labeling standards.
B. All Cables shall be identified and labeled AT BOTH ENDS.
C. Cable labels shall be wrapped around the cable (not a "flag").
D. The printed identifier shall be covered by the clear laminating part of the cable label.
3.2 BUILDING AND ROOM IDENTIFIERS
A. Technology Distribution Room (TDR)
1. The TDR room number shall be based on the guest room numbering.
2. The TDR room number shall include the floor number (i.e 05TDRN,
05TDRS). B. IDF/MDF - Existing, located in room 121
1. The IDF/MDF room number shall be based on the hotel room numbering plan.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 22
3.2 BUILDING AND ROOM IDENTIFIERS
C. IDF/MDF - Existing located in rooms 121
1. The IDF/MDF room number shall be based on the hotel room numbering plan.
3.3 MODULAR PATCH PANEL
A. Modular Patch Panels used to terminate Horizontal Cabling shall be labeled to identify:
- the Patch Panel I.D., and
- the individual Outlet I.D.s .
3.4 BACKBONE FIBER OPTIC CABLING AND TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Label each
cable at the termination point with a unique identifying code as follows: IDF- MDF(M50-
###/SM-###) where:
IDF = Intermediate Distribution Frame Number (including floor number) M50-
### = Fiber Count; 50/125-micron multimode fiber
SM-### = Fiber Count; Single-mode fiber
B. Each Fiber Optic Patch Panel shall be clearly labeled with a unique identifying code to identify:
- The near end optical fiber adapter (e.g., coupler) letter.
- The used ports.
- The far end TR room number.
- The far end coupler letter.
- Fiber type (e.g., M50 or SM)
- Far end used ports.
1. The cable identifiers are to be secured to the front cover of the panel enclosure.
2. Patch panel labels shall be visible from front of panel without opening panel cover.
3. Place patch panel labels for fiber strands on manufacturer designated labeling areas.
3.5 BACKBONE COPPER CABLING AND TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Label each cable at the termination point with a unique identifying code as follows: IDF-
MDF (###) where:
IDF = Intermediate Distribution Frame Number (including floor number) ### = Pair Count
3.6 WORK AREA OUTLET AND HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. The Communications Outlet shall be located in zones as indicated on drawings with a unique identifier.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 23
IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
3.6 WORK AREA OUTLET AND HORIZONTAL CABLING
B. Each Communications Outlet shall be labeled with a unique identifier.
1. Each cable terminated at the Communications Outlet will be labeled with the same identifying code(s).
C. Communications Outlet labels shall be positioned in the recessed label holders on the
faceplate and covered with the clear plastic covers.
1. Where Communications Outlet Faceplates not incorporating recessed holders are allowed,
the faceplate labels shall be protected with a clear laminate.
D. Horizontal Cables shall be labeled with the Communications Outlet ill - matching the Jack to which it
is terminated - as detailed herein.
a. Horizontal Cables be labeled within 4-inches of the cable at each end.
E. The Communication Outlet labeling code: TBD F.
Communication Cable labeling code: TBD
3.7 INNERDUCT
A. Innerduct containing fiber optic cable installed under this project shall be labeled where exposed.
1. This includes areas where the innerduct is installed in trays and in equipment rooms. B. The innerduct
shall be labeled with a durable Yellow Polyethylene tag that reads "CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE"
1. The tag shall provide blank spaces for adding fiber count and cable destination information.
2. The destination of the cable(s) contained in the Innerduct and the fiber count shall be marked on the
tag.
a. Hand lettering is acceptable on this tag, using an indelible type ink. C. The tag
shall be secured to the Innerduct using self-locking ties.
Note: If armored optical fiber cable is used, the use of innerduct may not be required.
3.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING AND GROUNDING:
A. All telecommunications bonding and grounding should be labeled as close as practicable (Le. For
ease of access and to read the label) to the point of termination. B. Labels shall be non-metallic and
include the following:
WARNING
IF THIS BONDING CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR MUST BE REMOVED, PLEASE CALL VISION VOICE &
DATA SOLUTIONS
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 24
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1-
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for Communications Equipment
Room Fittings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to General Requirements" which identifies related specification sections in this and other
Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References &
Standards.
B. Other applicable references and standards include:
1. CEA-31O-E, Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, 2005.
1.4 Definitions and Abbreviations
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
B. When a component is specified below as having a "powder coat finish", the surface finish shall
meet the following requirements:
1. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2197 - 98(2004) Standard Test Method for Adhesion of
Organic Coatings by Scrape Adhesion, Method A, there shall be no exposed metal or
discoloration with a 5.5-kg weight.
2. When tested in accordance with ASTM D3359 - 09 Standard Test Methods for Measuring
Adhesion by Tape Test, Method B, there shall be no flaking.
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
3. When tested in accordance with ASTM D522 - 93a(2008) Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend
Test of Attached Organic Coatings, there shall be no cracking or lifting on a .0125 inch diameter mandrel.
4. When tested in accordance with ASTM D3363 - 05 Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil
Test, coating shall withstand a minimum gauge hardness of 2H.
5. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2794 - 93(2004) Standard Test Method for
Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact), there shall be no chipping
or cracks with an 80 in-lb. direct hit or a 60 in-lb. indirect hit.
6. When tested in accordance with FED-STD-141, method 6192, with 1 kg load and 1000
cycles, there shall be a maximum 80-mg. loss.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS (FREE STANDING)
A. Equipment Racks shall be of aluminum construction with a polyurethane or powder-coat finish.
1. Finish Color shall be BLACK.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 25
B. The Rack shall be 84" (213 cm) tall with an 18" (38 cm) base depth and 6" (15.24 cm) inside channel
depth.
C. The Rack base shall be pre-drilled for securing rack to the floor.
D. The Rack shall be UL Listed.
E. Rack rails shall be spaced for 19" mounting rail-to-rail and shall be of a U shaped
construction with 12/24 pre-tapped holes in the CEA-31O-E standard hole pattern specifications
(5/8" - 518" - 1/2") providing 45 rack spaces on both the front and rear.
1. Rails shall have a universal side-drilling pattern to allow racks to be bolted together or
attachment of accessories.
2. Equipment Racks shall accept Vertical and Horizontal Cable Management hardware as
described below.
F. Each rack shall be supplied with:
1. a ground bar and #6 AWG Ground lug,
2. a minimum of fifty (50) 12/24 mounting screws shall be included with each Equipment Rack, and
3. a minimum of ten (10) releasable (e.g. "hook & loop") cable support ties.
a. Ties shall be individual units with a latch. A roll of hook & loop material is not acceptable. G.
Manufacturer, Model: Belden, Allen Tel, or Hubbell
2.2 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGER
A. The vertical cable management channel shall provide for cable routing on front and of each
equipment rack.
Manufacturer, Model: Belden, 84 inches (213 cm), 45U high and
10 inch (15.24 cm) width. Cable management fingers shall be provided at 1U vertically to accommodate
routing of trunk cabling and neat, organized patch cord routing. Provided with 12-inch (15.24 cm) deep
(minimum) cable management fingers.
The horizontal cable management channel shall provide for cable routing on front of each equipment
rack.
The vertical cable manager shall be double sided and equipped with dual hinge mounted doors on
the front. The vertical cable manager shall be provided with side cover panels for end racks.
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CHANNEL
The horizontal channel shall be comprised of two pieces:
1. the cable management panel, and
2. a hinged cover. B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
B.
C. The horizontal cable management channel shall be steel in construction and have a black powder
coat finish
D. The horizontal channel height shall be 2-RU (3.5").
E. The horizontal channels shall be manufactured of steel for rigidity.
1. Flat steel channel rings shall not be acceptable.
2. Channel depth shall be 2-RU (3.5")
F. The channel cover shall be hinged at the bottom and top, allowing it to snap open or closed.
1. There shall be no fasteners required for installation of the cover.
2. The cover shall not be removable unless the cover is in the horizontal position.
G. The horizontal channel base shall incorporate pass-through holes to allow patch cords to
connect at the rear of hubs.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 26
1. The pass-through holes shall be rolled edge design to prevent cable chafing. Rubber or plastic
grommets shall not be used.
H. The horizontal channel shall provide for a Rear Cable Organizer to provide for the attachment of a
cable channel equal to the channel cover used on the front.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 27
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CHANNEL
1. The rear cable organizer shall clip to the rear of the panel without the use of tools or
additional fasteners.
I. Manufacturer, Model: Belden or Allen Tel or Hubbell
1. 2-RU Horizontal Deep Channel w/Cover
2. Rear Cable Organizer
2.4 2-POST RACK
A. 84" H x 19" W 2-Post Frame
1. 45 RU equipment mounting capacity
B. Construction:
1. Aluminum and Steel
2. Finish: Black powder coat finish.
3. Rails:
a. CEA-31O-E Standard Universal 5/8"-5/8"-1/2" (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) vertical hole spacing
b. Tapped #12-24.
c. Markings identify rack unit positions on all rails
C. Each 2-Post Rack shall be supplied with:
1. 19" Rack channels
2. Base angles
3. Top angles
4. (100) screws, #12-24 x 5/8
D. Acceptable manufacturer: Belden, Allen Tel or Hubbell
2.5 4-POST RACK
A. 84" H x 19" W x 29" D 4-Post Frame
1. 45 RU equipment mounting capacity
B. Construction:
1. Aluminum and Steel
2. Finish: Black powder coat finish.
3. Rails: 19"W, Front & Rear
a. EIA-310-D Standard Universal 5/8"-5/8"-1/2" (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) vertical hole spacing
b. Tapped #12-24.
c. Markings identify rack unit positions on all rails
C. Static load capacity: 2,000 lbs.
D. Each 4-Post Rack shall be supplied with:
1. (4) 19" Rack channels
2. (2) Base angles
3. (2) Top angles
4. (100) screws, #12-24 x 5/8
2.7 LADDER RACK
A. Ladder Rack shall be used in communications equipment rooms (i.e., IDF’s and MDF’s,
Telecommunications Equipment Room, Entrance Facilities) to route cabling overhead. B.
Ladder Rack shall be:
1. constructed of 0.065" thick steel, and
2. utilize tubular stringers to support rungs. a.
Stringers shall be 1-112" high.
b. Rungs shall be welded to stringers and shall be spaced 9" on center.
C. Ladder Rack width(s) shall be as shown on the project Drawings. D.
Ladder Rack finish shall be BLACK epoxy.
E. Provide Cable Retaining Posts
1. Height: 4"
2. Color: Black
3. Use at 2 foot intervals.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 28
F. Provide Ladder Rack Radius Drop
1. Color: Black
2. One at every location where cabling is routed through the rungs or tray elevation changes by 6
inches or more.
G. Acceptable Manufacturer: CPI or Hubbell or Siemon
2.8 RACK BRACING
A. Used to secure equipment racks to the overhead cable tray system to stabilize the racks. B. Two
(2) assemblies per rack.
C. Provide and install all appurtenances necessary to secure the racks to the overhead cable tray,
including all brackets, hooks, bolts, washers, nuts and additional accessories, as required
to meet requirements of various rack/cable tray orientations encountered.
2.9 CATV SPLITTER, TRANSCENERS AND RECENERS
A. Shelf
1. Provide and install shelf:
a. Mechanical Room (basement) - 3 RU mounting capacity
b.MDF (ground floor) - 4 RU mounting capacity
2. Install in MDF, room 121 (ground floor)
3. Coordinate location of shelf in Data Center Primary with IT group
4. Color: Black
5. Qty: 1 each
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Provide equipment racks and cabinets as shown on the project Drawings. B. All
racks shall be bolted to the floor per manufacturers recommendations. C. Racks
shall be secured to the cable tray as described above.
D. Provide Horizontal and Vertical Cable Management in equipment racks per the project
Drawings.
E. Provide ground bar or lug in each equipment rack.
1. Bond rack mounted ground bar or lug to telecommunications room ground bar.
2. Multiple racks in common room shall be joined and ground made common.
3.2 LADDER RACK
A. Provide ladder rack and accessories necessary for a complete system.
B. Size and layout of the ladder rack shall be as shown on the project Drawings. C. Install
ladder rack and accessories per manufacturers' installation instructions.
D. A ladder rack in the TDR shall be installed above the racks as indicated on the drawings.
E. The ladder rack shall always be aligned with the front of the racks and braced to the racks with
threaded rod and brackets or support brackets made by the tray or rack manufacturer intended for this
purpose.
F. Radius drops shall be used where the cable drops from ladder rack to rack and at elevation changes
6" or more.
G. Provide cable retaining posts at 2 foot intervals on both sides of all ladder rack
H. Where ladder rack must be supported from the building structure:
1. Provide 3/8" threaded rods for support of 12" wide or smaller tray.
2. Provide 1/2" threaded rods for support of tray greater than 12" in width.
1. Maximum allowable deviation of tray from level horizontal plane measured across length of ladder
rack shall be 1/2", with the tray loaded to capacity.
J. Bond tray components together using manufacturer's standard accessories.
K. Fasten cables to ladder rack at intervals not to exceed 4 ft.
END OF SECTION 27
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 29
SECTION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for intra-building backbone cabling.
B. Both Copper and Fiber Optic cables and termination components are covered herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References &
Standards.
B. Other applicable references and standards include:
1. ANSIffIA-598-C-2005: Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
2. TIA/EIA 455-21-A: Mating Durability for Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices
3. ANSIffIA-526-14-B: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable
Plant; lEC 61280-4-1 edition 2, Fiber-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part
4-1: Installed cable plant- Multimode attenuation measurement
4. ANSI ffIA/EIA-526-7: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single-mode Fiber Cable
Plant
5. UL 910: UL Standard for Safety Test for Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for
Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air
6. UL 1666: Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed
Vertically in Shafts
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.5 WORK BY OWNER
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies Work by the Owner affecting the
subsystem(s) covered by this section.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
E. The cable shall consist of a core of solid-copper conductors insulated with polyethylene covered
by a PVC skin.
F. Jacket Type: PVC; Black or Grey color. G.
Cable Rating: NEC Article 800, UL listed
H. The cable shall meet or exceed the transmission performance requirements of ANSIITIA-
568-C.2 Category 3 or higher.
1. Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/-15% @ 0.772MHz
2. Attenuation: 15 dB/100 meters @ 4 MHz
3. Max Average DC resistance: 26.5 Ohms/l000 ft
4. Max Average DC resistance: 1.50% (unbalanced)
5. Max Capacitance: </= 100 pF/lOO-meters (unbalanced p to g)
6. Mutual capacitance: 15.7-nF/1000 ft @ I-kHz
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 30
a. be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and occlusions to meet optical, mechanical, and
environmental requirements of this specification,
b. have been subjected to minimum tensile proof test by fiber manufacturer equivalent to 100- kpsi, and
c. be splice free. (Factory optical fiber splices are not allowed.)
d. Coatings shall be mechanically strippable without damaging optical fiber.
e. Individual fiber buffers shall be color coded in accordance with the reference documents. D.
Multimode Optical Fibers:
1. Core diameter shall be 50-micron
2. Transmission Windows: 850-nm and 1300-nm
3. Core Diameter: 50-microns ± 3-microns
4. Cladding Diameter: 125-microns ± 2-microns
5. Coating Diameter: 245-microns ± 5-microns
6. Attenuation (Max) @850-nm: 3.0-dB/km (at 23° ± 5°C)
@1300-nm: 1.5-dB/km (at 23° ± 5°C)
7. LED Bandwidth (min) @850-nm: 1500-MHzekm
@1300-nm): 500-MHzekm
8. Effective Modal BW (min) @850-nm: 2000-MHzekm
@1300-nm: nla
9. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (A.O): 1297-nm <OW < 1316-nm
10. Zero Dispersion Slope (SO): < 0.101 ps/(nm2ekm)
11. Core-Clad Concentricity: < 3 microns
12. Cladding Non-circularity: < 2.0%
13. Core Non-circularity: < 5.0%
14. Point Discontinuity: < 0.2 dB at specified wavelengths.
15. When tested in accordance with FOTP-3, "Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling
Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components", average change
in attenuation over rated temperature range of cable shall not exceed 0.50 dB/km with
80% of measured fibers not exceeding 0.25 dB/km.
16. Minimum supported Ethernet distances shall be:
a. Gigabit Ethernet @850-nm: 1000-meters b.
Gigabit Ethernet @ 1300-nm: 600-meters
E. Single Mode Optical Fibers:
1. Core Diameter: 8.3 -microns
2. Transmission Windows: 13lO-nm and 1550-nm
3. Cladding Diameter: 125 -microns ± 1 -micron
4. Coating Diameter: 245 -microns ± 10 -microns
5. Maximum Attenuation (l31O-nm): 1.0-dBIkm (at 23° ± 5°C)
(1550-nm):0.8-dBIkm (at 23° ± 5°C)
6. Maximum Dispersion (131O-nm): 0.18-ps/nmekrn
(l550-nm): 17-ps/nmekm
7. Mode Field Diameter (13lO-nm): 9.3 ± 0.5 –micron (l550-nm): 10.5 ± 1.0 -microns
8. Cutoff Wavelength (A.ccf): < 1260-nm
9. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (/...0): 1301.5-nm < /...0 < 1321.5-nm lO.
Zero Dispersion Slope (SO): < 0.092 ps/(nm2ekm)
11. Core-Clad Concentricity: < 0.8 -microns
12. Coating-Cladding Concentricity: < 12 -microns
13. Cladding Non-circularity: < 1.0%
14. Point Discontinuity: < 0.1 dB at specified wavelengths
15. When tested in accordance with FOTP 3, "Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling
Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components", average change
in attenuation over rated temperature range of cable shall not exceed 0.05-dB1km at
1550-nm. Maximum attenuation change shall not exceed 0.15-dBIkm at 1550-nm. F. Intra-
building Backbone Cable
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 31
1. Cable shall be suitable for installation in free air, in building risers, in conduit, in cable tray, in
ladder rack and in innerduct.
2. The cable shall be constructed of all dielectric materials (no conductive materials).
3. Buffer Diameter: 900 -microns (tight buffer)
4. Strength Member: Aramid Yarn, fiberglass
5. Storage Temperature: -40° to +70°C (no irreversible change in attenuation)
6. Operating Temperature: -20° to +70°C (no irreversible change in attenuation)
a. Cables rated OFNP and intended for installation in plenum airspaces may carry a low
temperature rating of O°C.
7. Humidity Range: 0 to 100%
8. Maximum Tensile Strength (no irreversible change in attenuation). a.
During Installation 1300-N
b. Long Term 390-N
9. Bending Radius:
a. During Installation 20-times cable diameter b.
No Load l0-times cable diameter
10. Jacket Color
a. Laser-Optimized Multimode - Aqua (defined as fiber having Minimum Effective Modal
Bandwidth (MHz-krn) ~ 2000-MHz-km @ 850-nm)
b. Single-mode - Yellow
11. Cables installed along a path requiring a "Riser" rating, shall be listed as being suitable for use in
vertical run in shaft or from floor to floor and shall be listed as having fire-resistant characteristics.
a. Jacket material: PVC
b. These cables shall carry an OFNR rating.
12. Cables installed along a path requiring a "Plenum" rating, shall be listed as being suitable for use in air
handling spaces (plenum rated).
a. Jacket material: LSPVC or equivalent
b. These cables shall carry an OFNP rating.
G. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Berk-tek, Superior Essex, Mohawk
1. Manufacturer must be cabling partner of manufacturer of connecting components proposed and the
product proposed be covered under system warranty.
2.3 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
A. Connectors shall be LC-type.
B. The optical fiber within the connector ferrule shall be mechanically secured and index
matching gel shall be included in connector.
1. Connector shall incorporate a fiber stub that is fully bonded into the ferrule. The other end of each
assembly shall be precisely cleaved and placed into an appropriate alignment mechanism
to support a mechanical splice.
C. Connectors shall accept fibers having a buffered diameter of 900-microns. D.
Mechanical Specifications-
1. Ferrule Material Ceramic or Glass-in-Ceramic
2. Housing Material Composite
3. Ferrule size 125 -microns ± 2-microns
D. The connector's performance (measured in a two plug plus an alignment sleeve
configuration), shall be as follows:
a. Insertion loss (average)
b. Cable Retention
c. Durability
d. Impact
e. Thermal Shock f.
Humidity
g. Reflectance (SM only)
per FOTP-171, MM S O.3-dB; SM S O.2-dB per
FOTP~6; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-21; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-2; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 32
FOTP-3; S O.2-dB Attenuation change per
FOTP-5; SO.2-dB Attenuation change
S -55 dB (average)
2. LC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Multimode BEIGE, BLACK or CLEAR; with an AQUA Boot
b. Single-mode BLUE with BLUE Boot, Green (angled polished connectors)
3. SC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Single-mode Green (angled polished connectors)
F. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel
2.4 FIBER OPTIC COUPLINGS
A. Couplings shall be duplex LC-type. B.
Coupling materials shall be plastic.
C. Alignment sleeve material shall be as follows:
1. Mu1timode Phosphor Bronze or Ceramic
2. Single-mode Ceramic
D. LC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
1. Multimode AQUA
2. Single-mode BLUE
E. SC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
1. Single-mode GREEN
2.5 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS A.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels shall:
1. be enclosed assemblies,
2. incorporate hinged or retractable front cover,
3. be rack mountable on standard CEA-31O-E 19" equipment racks,
4. provide for strain relief of incoming cables,
5. incorporate radius control mechanisms to limit bending of fiber to manufacturer's
recommended minimums,
6. provide protection to both "facilities" and "user" sides of couplings, and
7. be configured to require only front access when patching.
B. Panels shall include provisions for permanent labeling of fiber optic cables.
1. Labeling shall be accessible from front of patch panel and shall not require disassembly of patch
panel enclosure or removal of front cover.
C. Connector couplings shall be mounted on assembly that snaps into patch panel enclosure.
1. This assembly shall be designed to accept variety of coupler types including, ST, SC,
Simplex SC, duplex SC and high-density mini-connectors (e.g., LC).
D. Access to inside of panel enclosure during installation shall be from front and rear.
1. Panels that require any disassembly of cabinet to gain entry will not be accepted. E.
Incoming cables shall not be accessible from patching area of panel.
1. The panel enclosure shall provide physical barrier to access of such cables. F.
Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE ROUTING & INSTALLATION
A. Route all cabling as identified in the project Drawings and specifications.
B. Prior to construction, confirm cable rating requirements (e.g., CMR, OFNR, OFCR, CMP, OFNP,
OFCP) for the planned cable route to insure compliance with applicable Code. Identify
any areas where cable other than that specified to the Engineer.
C. Cable shall be free of tension at both ends. In cases where cable must bear stress, provide wire-
mesh grips (e.g. Kellems) to spread stress over longer length of cable.
D. To reduce or eliminate EMI, position tray to provide for following minimum separation
distances from ~480V Power lines (where applicable):
1. Two (2) inches from power lines of <5-kVA (e.g., 20N120V power circuits).
2. Five (5) inches from fluorescent lighting.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 33
3. Six (6) inches from power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit or equivalent shielding in
proximity to a grounded metal conduit pathway.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 34
3.1 CABLE ROUTING & INSTALLATION
4. Twelve (12) inches from unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to a
grounded metal conduit pathway.
5. Twenty-four (24) inches from unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open or
nonmetal pathways.
6. Forty-seven (47) inches from electrical motors and transformers.
E. All Backbone cabling shall be installed as continuous runs without splices.
3.2 BACKBONE COPPER UTP CABLING
A. The Pair Count shall be per the project Drawings.
B. Terminate Backbone Copper Cable on the Backbone Field in the TDR's and DCP C.
Terminate cable on 48 port patch panels.
1. These patch panels shall be rack-mounted. Refer to the project Drawings.
D. All columns shall be co-located as to simplify installation and subsequent tracing of cross- connect
wiring.
E. Where new cabling is to be integrated with new or existing cabling at the termination location(s),
it will be the responsibility of the Contractor, in cooperation with the Owner, to
coordinate placement of Voice Termination hardware the Local Exchange Carriers) serving the site.
F. When terminating cable, maintain pair twists per manufacturers recommendations.
G. Remove cable jacket only to extent required to make terminations.
H. Cabling entering and exiting fields shall be neatly laced, dressed and supported.
1. Label all cables and termination components per Section 27 05 53 "Identification For
Communications Systems".
J. The Contractor shall not be responsible for jumper wiring between the Intra-building, Inter- building
and Feed Blocks unless specifically noted otherwise.
K. The Contractor shall not be responsible for connection of Telco connectors to owner
furnished telephone equipment unless specifically noted otherwise.
3.3 BACKBONE FIBER OPTIC CABLING
A. Strand Count shall be per the project Drawings.
B. Install fiber optic cables in 1-1/4 inch (3.2 centimeters) innerduct (1.D.) when the run is not in conduit
or when the conduit is 3 inch (7.5 centimeters) or larger.
1. The color of innerduct shall be coordinated if installed near existing innerduct.
C. Visually inspect cables for cuts, blisters and abrasions during installation. D.
Provide cable slack in each backbone fiber optic cable.
1. Slack shall be in addition to length of fiber required for termination requirements.
2. Store cable slack in enclosure designed for this purpose.
3. Slack required shall be as follows:
a. Minimum of 5 meters (each cable if applicable) coiled and secured at the TDR.
E. Terminate backbone fiber optic cable in the specified connector type on the Backbone Fiber
Field
Hampton Inn & Suites Hotel, 135 Second Street, Waltham, MA
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 35
(Fiber Optic Patch Panel).
1. Mate all terminated fibers to couplings mounted in a Fiber Optic Patch Panels.
a. Couplings shall be mounted on a panel that, in turn, snaps into the housing assembly. b. Any
unused panel positions shall be fitted with a blank panel.
c. Connectors from two cables shall never share a common coupling panel.
d. Multimode and Single-mode optical fibers shall be segregated on the panels as to clearly identify
the distinction between the fiber types.
F. Fibers shall be positioned consecutively per the manufacturer's color code - starting with the lowest
number - and mapped "position for position" between patch panels. There shall be no
transpositions in the cabling.
G. Proper orientation of the LC "Keyways" is required at each termination location.
1. Fibers shall be positioned consecutively ie., 1,2,3,4...) on both ends of an optical fiber link.
2. The LC Couplings/Adapters shall be installed in opposite manners on each end (i.e., A-B, AB...on
one end and B-A, B-A... on the other).
1. Refer to TIA-568-C.0 "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises" H. Label
all cables and termination components per Section 270553 "Identification For Communications
Systems".
1. All couplings shall be fitted with a dust cap.
3.4 TESTING
A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding the
requirements for scheduling and performance of compliance testing.
B. Backbone UTP Cable Testing
1. Contractor shall be responsible for testing each cable segment.
2. Backbone UTP cable pairs shall be verified for wire map (transposed/reversed/split pairs) and shorts
through toning of each conductor.
3. Cable shield or coupled bonding conductor shall be verified for end-to-end continuity.
4. Backbone Voice cables shall be 100% free of shorts within the pairs, and be verified for continuity,
pair validity and polarity and conductor position on the termination blocks (e.g. 110). Any mis-positioned
pairs shall be corrected.
C. Where cross-connection of Voice Cabling sub-systems (e.g., Primary and/or Secondary
Backbone) by the Contractor is specified, each subsystem shall be tested separately followed by a re-
test of the interconnected system after the cross-connection is complete.
D. Fiber Optic Cable Testing
1. Contractor shall detail proposed test plan for each cable type, including equipment to be used,
test frequencies and wavelengths, etc.
2. Test results shall include record of test wavelengths, attenuation measurements, fiber cable
type, fiber strand and overall cabling LD. number, measurement direction, test equipment type, model
and serial number, date, reference setup and crew member name(s).
3. Prior to installation:
a. Visually inspect reels and packaging for damage.
b. Review cable manufacturer's test report for each reel of cable provided to confirm
performance.
c. Perform testing at contractor option to verify performance and cable condition.
4. Post-Installation Testing shall include:
a. Attenuation (Insertion Loss) Testing
b.OTDR - All cables that contain splices and any cable which fail Attenuation testing. c. End-
to-End Optical Attenuation Insertion loss (average) perFOTP-171, MM:5 0.3-
dB; SM :5 0.2-dB
d. Cable Retention per FOTP-6; :5 0.2-dB Attenuation change e.
Durability per FOTP-21;:5 0.2-dB Attenuation change
f. Impact per FOTP-2;:5 0.2-dB Attenuation change
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 36
g. Thermal Shock per FOTP-3; :5 0.2-dB Attenuation change h.
Humidity per FOTP-5; ~0.2-dB Attenuation change
i. Reflectance (SM only) ~ -55 dB (average)
5. LC-type Connector Body color shall be as follows:
a. Multimode BEIGE, BLACK or CLEAR; with an AQUA Boot b.
Single-mode BLUE with BLUE Boot
6. SC-type Connector Coupling color shall be as follows:
a. Single-mode GREEN
7. Insertion Loss
a. Measure Optical Attenuation perTIAI-526-14-B (Multimode) and TIAJEIA-526-7 (Singlemode)
b. Test multimode fibers at 850 ± 30-nm and 1300 ± 20-nm wavelengths. c. Test
single-mode fibers at 1310 ± lO-nm and 1550 ± lO-nm wavelength.
d. Tests shall be performed in both transmission directions.
e. Fiber lengths less than or equal to 300 ft shall test to < 2.0 dB loss.
f. Fiber lengths greater than 300 feet shall test to loss value less than link loss budget for number
of installed connector mated pairs and optical fiber splices, if applicable.
8. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
a. Test multimode fibers at 850 ± 30-nm wavelength.
b. Test single mode fibers at 1310 ± lO-nm wavelength.
c. Traces shall be examined for continuity and anomalies.
d. Launch cord shall be minimum 100 ft long, or as noted by test equipment manufacturer.
9. The OTDR(s) shall incorporate high-resolution optics optimized for viewing of short cable sections.
10. Access Jumpers of adequate length to allow viewing of the entire length of the cable, including
the connectors at the launch and receive end, shall be used.
11. OTDR traces revealing a point discontinuity greater than 0.2-dB in a Multimode fiber, or 0.1-
.dB in a Single-mode fiber (if applicable) at any of the tested wavelengths or any discontinuity showing
a reflection at that point shall be a valid basis for rejection of that fiber.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding documentation
requirements.
B. Backbone copper cabling test results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor
pair (if applicable) and cable J.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model and serial number,
date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).
1. For category 3 and higher multi-pair cabling (e.g., 25-pair groupings), continuity verification
required.
2. For category 3 and higher 4-pair cabling, complete transmission performance measurements
required.
C. Backbone fiber optic cabling test results shall include a record of test wavelengths, attenuation
measurements, cable type, fiber strand and overall cable J.D., measurement direction, test equipment
type, model and serial number, date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).
SECTION 27- COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART I-
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for the Horizontal (Station) Cabling
subsystem.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification sections in this
and other Divisions (if applicable).
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 37
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
B. In this section, the Communications Outlet is considered to consist of a Frame / Faceplate into
which Modular Jacks or other couplings snap, the Modular Jacks and labeling/identification
components.
Unused jack positions are fitted with blanks.
PART I-GENERAL
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for product and/or
installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
B. Samples of the Communications Outlet "Faceplate(s) shall be submitted prior to construction to
confirm color and material.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality assurance
requirements for the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Project Drawings for quantities and location of Communications Outlets.
B. All Cables and Termination hardware shall be technically compliant with and installed in
accordance with referenced TIA documents.
C. All cables shall be suitable for installation in the environment defined and shall meet a
Plenum (CMP) rating (or permitted substitute as defined by the NEC).
D. Cables shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed, comply with Article 800 (Communications
Circuits) of the National Electrical Code and shall meet the specifications of
NEMA (low loss), UL 444, and ICEA (where applicable).
E. Horizontal (Station) Cable and Termination Components (Jack, Patch Panel) are specified to function
as a System.
1. Where required for warranty purposes, the manufacturers of cabling and termination
components used (if more than one) shall recognize each other in their Certification Programs. F. No
distinction between "Voice" and "Data" is made in the Horizontal Cabling subsystem.
G. Station Cable types include:
1. 4-pair Shielded Twisted Pair (FIUTP)
H. Station Cable types not applicable to this project include:
1. Fiber Optic to the Desktop
1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s) of connecting components:
1. Includes Modular Jacks, Communications Outlets, and Modular Patch Panels.
2. Components by same manufacturer shall be used throughout project.
3. All components of which the structured cabling system is comprised shall be fully certifiable by one of
the acceptable manufacturers identified above.
J. Value Engineering: The contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the equipment list at
time of procurement and confirming availability with manufacturers and suggesting viable
replacements and/or upgrades that would incur no additional cost to the project
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 38
.
2.2 4-PAIR FIUTP CABLE
A. The 4-pair FIUTP cables shall be constructed of four (4) Foiled twisted pair (FIUTP) with 24- AWG or
23-AWG insulated solid copper conductors.
B. The cable shall incorporate an overall shield.
C. Cable shall meet or exceed TIA Category 6A performance criteria as defined by the
referenced TIA documents.
D. Outer jacket shall be as required to meet flammability requirements for cable type.
E. Cable outside diameter for any 4-pair FIUTP Cable shall not exceed 0.30 in. (7.62 mm) F.
Maximum Pulling Load should not be rated for less than 25 lbs. (11.34 kg)
G. Pairs of a114-pair cables shall be identified by a banded color code in which conductor
insulation is marked with a dominant color and banded with a contrasting color. By pair number, the pair
colors or dominant bands are:
Pair 1: Tip – White/Blue; Ring - Blue (or Blue/White)
Pair 2: Tip - White/Orange; Ring - Orange (or Orange/White) Pair
3: Tip - White/Green; Ring - Green (or Green/White)
Pair 4: Tip – White/Brown; Ring - Brown (or Brown/White) H.
The jacket color shall be as follows:
1. Horizontal Cable designated for Voice/Data - BLUE.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Mohawk.
1. Manufacturer must be cabling partner of manufacturer of connecting components proposed and the
product proposed be covered under system warranty.
2.3 FlBER OPTIC STATION CABLE
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.4 COAX STATION CABLE
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.5 MODULAR JACKS
A. Jacks shall be 8 position, 8-conductor (8P8C) non-keyed.
B. Jacks shall be designed for 100-Ohm FIUTP cable termination.
C. Jacks shall meet or exceed the transmission requirements of TIA Category 6A. D.
Jacks shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2000 registered manufacture.
E. Jacks shall be:
CENELEC EN 50173 compliant.
Nationally Registered Testing Laboratory (NRTL) VERIFIED for performance. UL
LISTED 1863 and CSA certified.
F. Each jack shall be an individually constructed unit and shall snap-mount in an industry standard
keystone opening.
G. Jack housings shall be high impact 94 VO rated thermoplastic.
H. Modular jack contacts shall be constructed of Beryllium copper for maximum spring force and
resilience.
1. Contact Plating shall be a minimum of 50-micro-inches of gold in the contact area over
50micro-inches of nickel.
1. Jacks shall terminate 22-26 AWG stranded or solid conductors.
2.3 FlBER OPTIC STATION CABLE
J. The interface between jack and station cable shall be insulation displacement type contact.
1. Cable pairs shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all conductors adjacent to its pair mate to
better maintain pair characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer.
2. Jacks shall be compatible with standard single conductor impact termination tools.
3. Jacks shall be supplied with wire retention caps.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 39
K. Jacks shall have an operating temperature range of -lOOC (14°F) to 60°C (140 OF). L. Jacks
shall be pinned per TIA T568B pinning as follows:
Pair 1 - Pins 5 & 4
Pair 2 - Pins 1 & 2
Pair 3 - Pins 3 & 6
Pair 4 - Pins 7 & 8
M. Jacks shall have an attached color-coded wiring instruction label as an aid to the installer. N. Jacks
shall be available in a variety of colors for identification or designation of applications
at the workstation or closet.
1. Default Jack color shall be White unless specified otherwise.
O. Jacks shall have a designation indicating perfonnance (e.g. "Category 6A", "Cat 6A" or
"C6A") either on the front or rear of the connector, which may be visible from the front of the
faceplate.
P. Jacks shall be compatible with TIAJEIA-606-A color code labeling and accept snap on icons
for identification or designation of applications.
Q. Jacks shall be supplied with installed dust covers to protect the jack opening and internal elements
during installation until the jack is in use.
1. No damage to the Jack pinning shall result from insertion or removal of these covers. R. Icons
used at the faceplate
1. Red for DATA
2. Blue for MEDICAL DATA
S. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel.
2.6 COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTORS
A. Not applicable to this Project.
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WORK AREA
A. Flush Faceplates shall accommodate the installation of wall mounted or surface raceway mounted
Communications Outlets.
B. Modular Jacks, fiber optic couplings (if applicable) and coaxial connectors (if applicable) shall snap into
the faceplate.
C. Faceplates shall be constructed of high impact 94 v-o rated thermoplastic (except where
noted otherwise, stainless steel).
D. Faceplates shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified.
E. Faceplate shall be configured to accommodate the number of modular jacks as required by the
location. Refer to installation details drawing.
F. Faceplates shall be available in White and stainless steel
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WORK AREA
1. Faceplate color(s) shall be coordinated with the owner to match the decor of the area in which
the Telecommunications Outlet is located.
Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell Allen Tel.
Faceplates shall have plastic covers over the mounting screws that can be replaced with a clear plastic
window over a printable paper insert.
Faceplate shall be configured to mount on standard, single gang outlet box when wall mounted.
Faceplates shall provide for TIAlEIA-606-A compliant station labeling
Faceplates at tack board surfaces, painted accent walls, and plastic laminate panels shall be plastic.
COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET -WALL-MOUNT TELEPHONE
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 40
Faceplates intended to be used in locations where a wall mounted phone set is required shall comply with
the following:
1. Faceplate shall be plastic construction,
2. Faceplate shall accommodate one (1) modular jack meeting the performance requirements for
modular jacks as defined above and positioned to mate with a wall- mounted telephone.
3. Faceplate shall mount on standard single gang outlet box, and
4. Faceplate shall include mounting posts appropriate for mounting a wall-mounted telephone
G.
H.
1.
J.
2.8
A.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden, Hubbell, Allen Tel.
2.10 MODULAR PATCH PANEL - CATEGORY 6
A. Modular Patch Panels shall provide for the termination of Horizontal (Station) cables.
B. The Panels shall incorporate 8 positions, 8-conductor (8P8C) non-keyed Modular Jacks. C. The
Panels shall be designed for 100-Ohm FIUTP cable termination.
D. The Panels shall meet or exceed the transmission requirements of TIA Category 6A. E. Jacks
shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2000 registered manufacture.
F. The Panels shall be:
CENELEC EN 50173 compliant. UL
VERIFIED for performance.
UL LISTED 1863 and CSA certified.
G. Panels shall be rack mountable in standard CEA-31O-E 19" equipment racks. H.
Panels shall be made of black anodized aluminum.
2.10 MODULAR PATCH PANEL - CATEGORY 6
1. Panels shall be manufactured with a rolled-edge at the top and bottom for stiffness.
2. Contact plating shall be a minimum 50-micro-inch gold plating on contact surfaces over 50-
100 micro-inch of nickel compliant with FCC part 68.
1. Panels shall be terminated in T568B wiring scheme.
J. Panels shall be equipped with an IDC-type termination made of fire retardant UL 94VO rated
thermoplastic and tin, lead solder plated IDC
1. Panels shall terminate 22-26 AWG solid conductors, maximum insulated conductors.
2. Panels shall provide wiring identification & color code and maintain a paired punch down
sequence that does not require the overlapping of cable pairs.
K. Panel circuit boards shall be fully enclosed front and rear for physical protection.
L. Panels shall have port identification numbers on both the front and rear of the panel.
M. Panels shall have rear cable support bar for strain relief, which shall clip to the rear of the patch
panel.
1. As an option, an external cable support bar may be used.
2. The Panel and cable support hardware shall insure that the minimum bend radius
requirements of the horizontal cabling are satisfied.
N. The port identification numbers on the panel front shall be located so as to minimize
obstruction by patch cords.
O. The panel front shall have two raised panel identification label fields to accept 1/2' label inserts.
P. Panels shall have self-adhesive, clear label holders and white designation labels provided with the
panel for each 8-port adapter.
Q. Acceptable Manufacturer(s): Belden.
2.11 DISTRIBUTION HUBS PATCH PANEL - CATV OVER UTP
A. Rack-mountable passive distribution hubs with 8 or 16 front mounts modular 8-pin jacks for
connection to UTP 4-pair cabling, and "F" fitting on rear panel for connection to coaxial backbone cable.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 41
B. Hubs shall be tested compliant with FCC Part 15 requirements. Bandwidth: 5 - 860 MHz. e. Hubs
shall be supplied with quantities of plug-in terminators to terminate all unused ports. D. Provide
quantities of hubs necessary to provide individual hub connection port for each television outlet in the
system.
3.3 Cable Routing
A. A "Service Loop" for every Horizontal Cable shall be stored in the ceiling above the outlet. . In cases
where cables are routed in the ceiling of the floor below (i.e. under open office spaces, conference
rooms), cables shall be stored in the ceiling of the floor below or prior to entering raceway.
1. Loop length shall be lO-ft. (3-meters).
2. The total length of the horizontal cable including the loop shall not exceed 295-ft (90-meters).
3. The loop shall be placed in the ceiling at the last support (e.g.. J-Hook) before the cables enter a
fishable wall, conduit, surface raceway or box.
4. Loop radius (minimum) shall be 4X the minimum bend radius for the cable.
3.3 Cable Routing
B. During installation, the minimum bend radius shall be eight times the outside diameter of FIUTP cables
and 20 times the outside diameter of fiber cables.
C. At the point of termination, the minimum bend radius shall be four times the outside diameter of FIUTP
cables and 10 times the outside diameter of fiber cables. If fiber cable manufacturer allows tighter bend
radius, shall not exceed manufacturers requirements.
D. FIUTP cables to be run a minimum of 2 in. (5 cm.) from AC power distribution cables unless in
separate steel channels.
E. A minimum separation of 5 in. (12.5 cm.) should be maintained between FIUTP communications
cables and fluorescent light ballasts.
F. All power and communications cables are to cross perpendicularly where crossings are absolutely
necessary.
G. Where cables are run in system furniture raceways, communications cables are to be run in separate
physical channels within the furniture system. A minimum separation of 2 in. (5 cm.) should be maintained
between the power and communications cable routes. Where power and communications cables are to
cross paths within the furniture system, cables are to cross perpendicularly.
H. The delivery of cable runs to the furniture system should be developed in accordance with the
capabilities of the particular system to be used. The cables can be fed down a power pole or a column
and enter the furniture using a flex conduit. Care should be taken to ensure that sufficient entry points are
provided into the furniture system and that the flex conduit is of sufficient diameter.
1. Cabling shall be run in free air, in conduit, in raceways or in cable tray as designated on the project
Drawings.
1. Where installed in Cable Tray, cables shall be laid neatly in the tray and not be tie wrapped.
After exiting the tray, cables shall be tie wrapped and supported every 3 to 5 ft (l to 1.5 m) with approved
non-continuous cable support devices, such as communications rated J-hooks.
2. Where installed in free-air, cables shall be supported using J-hook type cable supports installed in
accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements.
a. Spacing of I-hook cable supports shall be every 3 to 5 ft (1 to 1.5 m) or in accordance with cable
manufacturer's specifications, whichever distance is shorter.
b. J-hook fill capacities shall be per manufacturer's recommendations and shall consider the diameter
of the cable type(s) being installed.
3.4 Testing
A. Refer to Section 27 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding the requirements for
scheduling and performance of compliance testing.
B. All cabling shall be 100% fault free unless noted otherwise. If any cable is found to be outside the
specification defined herein, that cable and the associated termination(s) shall be replaced
by the contractor. The applicable tests shall then be repeated.
C. Testing of FIUTP Horizontal Cabling shall be as follows:
1. Testing shall be from the Jack at the Communications Outlet to the Patch Panel on which the cables
are terminated at the Telecommunications Room serving that location.
2. Testing shall be per TIA-1152 Permanent Link test configurations for the applicable
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA May 23, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 42
categories of cabling under test.
3. All cables shall be free of shorts within the pairs, and be verified for Continuity, Pair Validity and
Polarity, and Wire Map (Conductor Position on the Modular Jack).
3.4 Testing
4. In addition to the above, Performance Testing shall be performed on all cables. Testing of the
Transmission Performance shall include the following: Wire
map, including shield connection if present
Length
Insertion 10ssNEXT loss, measured from local end
NEXT loss, measured from far-end
PSNEXT loss, measured from local end
PSNEXT loss, measured from far-end
ACRF
PSACRF
Return loss, measured from local end
Return loss, measured from far-end
Propagation Delay
5. Delay Skew Cables shall be tested to the maximum frequency defined by the standards covering
the specified performance category.
a. Transmission Performance Testing shall be performed using a test instrument designed for
testing to the specified frequencies.
b. Test records shall verify "PASS" on each cable and display the specified parameters
comparing test values with standards based "templates" integral to the unit.
6. The Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) used for the cable type under test shall be
traceable to manufacturer's product data.
a. Test results obtained using an incorrect NVP will be rejected.
D. CATV OVER UTP Testing
1. Installer shall completely test all system functions and distribution lines. Levels at all outlets shall be
tested for signal strength using a signal strength meter (Blonder-Tongue FSM-Il or
equal).
2. A standard receiver fed from the same outlets shall show no visible components of cross modulation or
beat interference. At each outlet, signal strength shall be measured at lowest and highest frequency used
in the system and results recorded and entered in manuals.
3. The signal-to-noise ratio shall be tested at the last outlet on the longest branch by recording the signal
strength of the picture carrier of each channel and them recording the readings at the
same frequencies with the in put to the amplifiers terminated at 75 ohms.
4. All readings of the above tests shall be recorded and entered in the manuals.
3.5 Documentation
A. Refer to Section 27 "Communications" for general guidelines regarding documentation
requirements.
B. Test results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and cable
(or Outlet) J.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model and serial number, date,
reference setup, and crew member name(s).
C. Information added by the Contractor to Record Drawings relating to Horizontal Cabling shall
include cable routes, outlet locations and numbering and other detail necessary to document.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 43
3.6 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a Manufacturer's Warranty covering all Copper and Fiber Optic
Cabling and Connecting Components.
1. Materials shall be covered for no-less than twenty (20) years from date of
substantial completion of this work.
2. Labor and workmanship shall be covered for no-less than twenty (20) years from
date of substantial completion of this work.
3. The Warranty on the Station Cabling and Components shall be a complete System Channel
Warranty and cover the Permanent Link (Communications Outlet to Patch Panel or
Block) as defined by the referenced TIA documents.
4. This Warranty shall be direct from the manufacturer(s) of the cabling and
connecting components to the Owner.
B. All other materials shall carry the minimum Warranty as identified in Section 27
C. This guarantee shall include all labor. material and travel time. See Division 1 "General
Conditions" and "General Requirements" - Guarantee Documents for further requirements.
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES &
ADAPTERS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section details product and execution requirements for Communications Connecting
Cords,
Devices &
Adapters. B.
Included are:
1. 4-pair Modular Patch Cords
2. Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords
3. Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords
C. Quantities and lengths for each item shall be as detailed in the Execution part of this Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies related specification
sections in this and other Divisions (if applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES & STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies pertinent
References & Standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides information on Definitions and
Abbreviations used in this and related sections.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which provides general guidelines for
product and/or installation information to be submitted by the contractor.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 270000 "Communications" which identifies general quality
assurance requirements for the project.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 44
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 4-PAIR MODULAR PATCH CORDS
A. 4-pair Modular Patch cords are used to connect equipment to the communications
outlet and for signal routing within the MDF and IDF’s.
B. 4-pair Modular Patch Cords shall:
1. be constructed of four (4), 24 AWG, 7/32 stranded tinned copper twisted pairs,
insulated with polyethylene, and
2. be twisted-pair (F/UTP).
C. Patch Cord Modular Plugs shall be 8P8C and be pinned TlA T568B.
1. The dimensions of the finished plug assembly shall allow for patch cords to be
positioned in adjacent ports of the Modular Patch Panel specified herein.
D. Patch Cord Jacket shall be colored PVC and be configured with a snagless molded boot of
matching color according to Hilton specifications
E. Patch Cords shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of TlA Category 6.
1. Where required by the Manufacturers performance Warranty, the Patch Cords shall be
by the cabling and/or connecting component manufacturer whose products are installed
under this
project or by a manufacturer recognized and approved by that manufacturer.
F. Patch Cords shall be 100% factory tested.
G. Patch Cords shall be Independently Verified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
(NRTL).
H. Patch Cords shall be assembled by a manufacturer recognized by the manufacturer(s)
of the cable and termination components used in the horizontal station "link".
1. Patch Cords shall be channel balanced with the Jacks & Patch Panels specified
herein for use in the Horizontal Cabling subsystem.
1. Cable used to manufacture patch cords meets the category 6 specifications set forth by both
ANSIITlA-568-C.2-2009 and ISOIIEC 11801:2002.
2.2 COAX PATCH CORDS
A. Not applicable to this Project.
B. Fiber Optic Patch Cords are used to connect equipment to the backbone cabling
and (if applicable) interconnect backbone cabling segments.
C. Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
2.3 FiBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS
1. be duplex SC - to - duplex LC type,
2. incorporate multimode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cabling
system specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic ferrules.
4. have connector bodies that are BEIGE, BLUE, BLACK or CLEAR in color,
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have an AQUA cable jacket, and
7. be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. C.
Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
1. be duplex LC - to - duplex LC type,
2. incorporate single-mode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cable
system specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic or glass-in-ceramic ferrules,
4. have connector bodies that are BLUE in color,
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have a YELLOW cable jacket, and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
LOW VOLTAGE CABLING
270000 - 45
7. Be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. D.
Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords shall:
1. be duplex SC - to - duplex SC type,
2. incorporate single-mode optical fiber meeting the specifications of the backbone cable
system if specified herein,
3. incorporate ceramic or glass-in-ceramic ferrules,
4. have connector bodies that are GREEN in color, with BLUE boot
5. incorporate strain relief at the rear of the connector body,
6. have a YELLOW cable jacket, and
7. Be duplex construction with channels of
equal length. E. Fiber Patch Cords shall be
100% factory-tested.
1. Test documentation and/or manufacturer's quality control certification shall be included with
each Patch Cord or be available from the manufacturer on request.
2. Fiber jumpers shall meet a minimum of IEEE 802.3 series of 10 Gigabit Ethernet
Standards as well as IEC-60793-2-l0 and TIA-492AAAC specifications for laser
bandwidth Differential Mode Delay (DMD) specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish loose materials. Obtain written confirmation by an authorized
representative of client for all loose materials furnished.7
B. Prior to Construction, confirm connector types, length and quantities with client. For
purposes of bidding, consider requirements as detailed below.
3.2 QUANTITIES & LENGTHS
A. Furnish 4-pair Modular Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to 1 per terminated data jacks at patch panel in TDR
2. Provide lengths with minimal slacks
3. Provide 10% spare
B. Furnish 4-pair Modular Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to 1 per terminated data jacks at patient rooms, nurse stations, offices
2. Lengths - 7 foot
3. Color - Green
4. Provide 10% spare
C. Furnish Duplex Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (8) per TDR.
2. Provide 50% 2-meter and 50% 3-meter lengths.
3. This is inclusive of requirements at TDRs and Data Centers.
D. Furnish Duplex Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (8) per TDR.
2. Provide 50% 2-meter and 50% 3-meter lengths.
3. This is inclusive of requirements at TDRs and Data Centers.
E. Furnish Duplex Single-mode Fiber Optic Patch Cords in the quantities as follows:
1. Qty. equal to (3) per Headend, Splitter and TDR's.
2. Provide lengths as required.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 1
SECTION 272000
IP Telephone System
1. GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
HAP invites proposals and pricing for the system from firms that have experience in furnishing, installing
and maintaining such systems for building entities of similar size and complexity in the region, and that
have the staff capacity and expertise to do so for HAP Live 155.
It is the intent of HAP that the telephone system will interface with a digital access entry system in of the
north and south entry points of the building as well as providing telephony, voicemail, and call forwarding
services to all the tenants of the building. The phone system required interface capabilities will be
described in detail in section 2.17 of this document.
The primary goal of this document is to invite a telephone system vendor to propose and competitively
price a phone system that will provide for the communication needs of the tenants, interface with building
access control devices, reduce maintenance, line and operational costs, increase productivity and
simplify system administration.
1.2 Project Schedule
To be determined.
1.3 Proposal Response Format
Please prepare your responses to this invitation using the following format.
1.3.1 Technical Proposal
1.3.1.1 Section 1, Letter of Transmittal
Include a brief statement demonstrating your understanding of the system to be purchased and the work
to be performed.
1.3.1.2 Section 2, Vendor Description & Qualifications
Provide a brief description of your firm’s qualifications and experience as it relates to the subject of this
purchase as defined by Section 1. Provide in this section the required reference information as listed in
Section 1.21.
1.3.1.3 Section 3, System Description
Provide a complete and detailed technical and functional description of the equipment and services
proposed. Include in this section your responses to all required items listed in Section 2 of the purchase
document.
1.3.1.4 Section 4, Project Plan
Provide a complete typical project work plan, detailing all tasks that will be performed under the contract.
Include a listing of all tasks, and name the responsible parties for completing the tasks. Provide
responses to all items in Section 3 of the purchase document. Provide a typical project schedule and
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 2
cutover plan itemizing each task, and identify the length of time necessary for a successful installation.
Identify any HAP resources that you will require to complete the installation.
1.3.1.5 Section 5, Warranty, Maintenance and Post-Installation Support
Provide complete responses to all the stated requirements for a full warranty and subsequent
maintenance agreements.
1.3.1.6 Section 6, Exceptions
Clearly state any exceptions to the requirements listed in the RFP, and any exceptions to the HAP 155
Live special conditions. (See Attachment A)
1.3.1.7 Section 7, Pricing
Explain in detail the pricing for the proposed system. Complete the Summary Pricing Sheet as described
in Section 6 of this purchase document. The Summary Pricing Sheet must be signed by an authorized
representative of the Contractor’s firm. Describe all costs that HAP Live 155 Project will incur on an
annual basis, including capital, operating, maintenance and upgrades. Complete the Detailed Pricing
Spreadsheets.
1.4 Evaluation Criteria
Evaluation of proposals and selection of the preferred contractor will be by
The project GC evaluating the criteria to be included in the assessment of pricing proposals will include
the following key points:
Total projected life cycle costs
Qualifications of the contractor
Good name of the manufacturer
System capabilities, features, functionality, reliability and capacity
Relevant experience of the contractor
Ease of user experience and ease of administration
Qualifications/experience of proposed project manager
Warranty and maintenance
Installation and cutover plan and schedule
Responsiveness of pricing proposal
1.5 Minimum Requirements
Contractors must meet the following minimum requirements in order for their proposals to receive further
consideration. Minimum requirements may be met by a prime contractor or any subcontractor on the
prime contractor’s team.
1. Contractor must have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the telecommunications industry, furnishing,
installing and supporting telephone and intercommunications systems of similar size and complexity.
2. The proposed system design and configuration must meet or exceed all of the requirements of the
pricing proposal document with regard to capacity, functionality, performance, reliability, scalability,
survivability and security as detailed in section 2.
3. Contractor must submit with its proposal a comprehensive and detailed system warranty, maintenance
and ongoing support program that meets or exceeds all the requirements stated in section 3 of the pricing
document including performance monitoring, maintenance, preventive maintenance, trouble resolution,
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 3
response times, escalation procedures, management and statistical reporting, and penalties for non-
compliance.
4. Contractor must assign a Project Manager with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in managing
installations of similar size and scope.
5. Contractor must submit a detailed work plan and schedule.
6. Contractor must submit a minimum of three (3) references including project descriptions and current
contact information of the individual that can comment on the Contractor’s performance. The reference
projects provided should be for IP-based telephone and intercommunications systems, of the same make
and model, and of similar size and complexity to the HAP Live 155 project.
7. Contractor must submit detailed pricing as described in Section 6 of this document.
1.10 Manufacturer’s Guarantee
Part A - The Contractor shall secure from the manufacturer, if the Contractor is not the manufacturer, a
written guarantee executed by the manufacturer stating that the Contractor is qualified and certified by the
manufacturer to perform the work described in the pricing document pertaining to manufacturer’s
products.
Part B - The Contractor shall secure from the manufacturer, if the Contractor is not the manufacturer, a
written guarantee executed by the manufacturer stating that the manufacturer, in the event that the
Contractor is unable to complete an acceptable installation within the terms and conditions of such
contract, will perform or cause to be performed all installation obligations of the contractor for the awarded
contract at no additional cost to HAP Live 144 project.
Part C - The Contractor shall secure from the manufacturer, if the Contractor is not the manufacturer, a
written guarantee executed by the manufacturer stating the manufacturer, in the event that the Contractor
is unable to provide continuing maintenance within the terms and conditions of such contract, will perform
or cause to be performed all maintenance obligations of the contractor for the awarded contract at a cost
to the Town no greater than the Contractor's then prevailing rates per the pricing proposal.
Part D - For a five-year period from the date the HAP has accepted the installation pursuant to the terms
of the contract the manufacturer's guarantee will also include the following:
1. Parts supply and replacement.
2. Manufacturing field support and maintenance to protect HAP from interruption of service due to the
inability of the Contractor to meet his service obligations. This support and maintenance will be provided
at the costs identified in this proposal. The determination of what constitutes inability of the Contractor to
meet service obligations under the contract shall be that of the Town in its sole discretion.
3. Continued enhancement and upgrade of the proposed system hardware and software.
Part E - In the event the Contractor proposes to supply principal components of the system from different
manufacturers, separate written guarantees from the manufacturers must be supplied as requested
above. Contractors should request direction from the HAP Live 155 project if a question is raised as to
whether an item comprises a principal component requiring a separate manufacturer's guarantee.
Part F - The Contractor must demonstrate that it has a stable and long-term relationship with the
manufacturer. Provide documentation that this relationship is, at a minimum, 5 years in duration. The
above referenced manufacturer's guarantee must be submitted with the proposal.
1.11 Award
An award will be made to the Contractor whose proposal is most responsive to the needs of the HAP Live
155 project as determined solely by the GC.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 4
1.12 Proposal Costs
Contractors are solely responsible for their own expenses in preparing a pricing proposal and for
subsequent negotiations with the GC for the HAP 155 Live project, if any. If HAP and or the GC elect to
reject all proposals, the neither HAP or the GC will be liable to any Contractor for any claims, whether for
costs or damages incurred by the Contractor in preparing the proposal, loss of anticipated profit in
connection with any final Contract, or any other matter whatsoever. The GC is likely to require one or
more meetings with Contractors that have been selected as finalist for this project. Contractors are solely
responsible for their own expenses attributable to any activity or materials related to such meetings.
1.13 Completeness of Proposal
By submission of a pricing proposal the Contractor warrants that all components required to run the
system have been identified in the proposal, or will be provided by the Contractor at no charge.
1.14 Reservation of Rights
The GC and HAP reserve the right to:
Reject any and all pricing proposals received in response to this request for Bid.
Waive or modify minor irregularities in pricing proposals received.
Utilize any and all ideas and suggestions submitted in the proposals received.
Change the quantities of equipment or service to be furnished in order to reflect any system
requirements which may become known after issuing the request for a bid. The unit prices furnished with
the proposal will be used to modify the contractor's quoted price.
Negotiate with multiple Contractors to serve the best interests of HAP.
Act as a self-reference for any vendor with which the HAP has prior experience.
Should HAP or the GC be unsuccessful in negotiating a contract with the selected Contractor within an
acceptable time frame, HAP may conduct negotiations with another Contractor.
1.15 Compliance with Applicable Laws and Ordinances
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable state and federal laws, and ordinances, codes and
regulations.
1.16 Withdrawal of Proposals
Once its pricing proposal is submitted and received for consideration and comparison with the other
proposals similarly submitted, the Contractor agrees that it may not and will not withdraw it within ninety
(90) consecutive calendar days after the actual date of the opening of proposals unless extended by
addendum.
1.17 Subcontractors and Third Parties
It is the intention of the GC and HAP to award a single contract for the work to be performed. Contractors
intending to enter into partnerships, or use subcontractors or third parties to provide any
components/subsystems or to perform any portion of the work must include a description of which
portion(s) of the Contract will be performed by partners, subcontractors or third parties, the names and
addresses of the partners/subcontractors/third parties, and the expected amount of money each will
receive under the Contract. Contractors may not use the services of other Partners, subcontractors, third
parties not named in the Contractor's pricing proposal without prior written permission from the GC and or
HAP. The contractor shall be completely responsible for the actions of its partners, subcontractors, third
party providers, the components/subsystems that they provide, and the performance of their work as if
the partners, subcontractors, third parties were employed directly by the Contractor.
1.19 Insurance Bond
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 5
Insurance Requirements
Vendor/Contractor shall agree to maintain in force at all times during the contract the following minimum
coverage and shall name the GC and HAP as an additional Insured on a primary and non-contributory
basis to all policies except Workers Compensation. All policies should also include a Waiver of
Subrogation. Insurance shall be written with Carriers approved in the State of Connecticut and with a
minimum AM Best’s Rating of “A-“VIII. In addition, all Carriers are subject to approval by HAP
(Minimum Limits)
General Liability Each Occurrence
General Aggregate
Products/Completed Operations
Aggregate
$1,000,000
$2,000,000
$2,000,000
Auto Liability Combined Single Limit
Each Accident $1,000,000
Umbrella
(Excess Liability)
Each Occurrence
Aggregate
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
If any policy is written on a “Claims Made” basis, the policy must be continually
renewed for a minimum of two (2) years from the completion date of this contract. If the
policy is replaced and/or the retroactive date is changed, then the expiring policy must be endorsed to
extend the reporting period for claims for the policy in effect during the
contract for two (2) years from the completion date.
Workers’ Compensation and WC Statutory Limits
Employers’ Liability EL Each Accident $500,000
EL Disease Each Employee $500,000
EL Disease Policy Limit $500,000
Original, completed Certificates of Insurance must be presented to The GC and HAP prior to contract
issuance. Vendor/Contractor agrees to provide replacement/renewal certificates at least 60 days prior to
the expiration date of the policies.
1.20 Contractor Qualifications and Minimum Requirements
1.20.1 Contractor References
The Contractor must demonstrate experience and capability in the installation and maintenance of the
proposed systems, by providing evidence of successful completion of projects of similar size and scope.
The Contractor shall provide a list of at least three (3) customer references, with the following information:
Customer name and location
Contact person(s): name, title, telephone number and email address
System and size (number of locations and stations)
System installation date
Years’ system has been maintained by contractor
Any special features or functionality implemented or proposed
HAP & the GC may make any investigations as it deems necessary to determine the ability of Contractors
to perform the work, and Contractors shall furnish HAP all such information and data for this purpose as
HAP and the GC may request.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 6
1.20.2 Project Management Team
A critical component of the GC & HAP’s evaluation of the Contractor will be the
team of individuals that the Contractor proposes to perform the installation.
The Contractor shall identify and appoint a competent and experienced Project Manager to act as its
representative, and to supervise its employees and partners/subcontractors/third party providers during
the installation, cutover, and final testing of the system. The resume of the proposed Project Manager,
including references, shall be submitted with the proposal. During any subsequent interviews, the
proposed Project Manager shall attend. The GC and HAP will use this opportunity to evaluate the
proposed Project Manager, and his/her communications skills and project management/leadership
capabilities. The Contractor shall not replace the Project Manager without the GC’s or HAP’s written
approval.
The Contractor shall also identify additional key personnel who shall support the designated Project
Manager, and be available to the Town in the absence of the primary Project Manager. The Contractor
shall clearly describe escalation procedures available to the HAP. Once the key project team members
have been assigned and accepted, the GC and/or HAP will reserve the right to approve any proposed
substitutions.
The Contractor shall not rely on GC staff for support in excess of normal project participation. HAP and/or
GC staff participation is expected to include providing access to facilities, providing documentation,
attendance at project meetings, and necessary coordination. The Contractor shall clearly identify any
HAP or GC resources it requires.
1.21 Public Announcements
Public announcements or news releases pertaining to this contract shall not be made without prior
permission of HAP.
1.22 Contract Template
Attached hereto as Attachment A are HAP’s standard terms and conditions. Contractors shall be
prepared, if selected, to agree to the terms stated in the contract. Material changes to the terms and
conditions will not be permitted. This pricing document and Contractor’s response to the pricing document
will be attached as exhibits to the resulting contract in order to establish the scope of work or for any other
relevant reason. Contractors shall list any exceptions to the HAP’s standard terms and conditions in
Section 6 of their pricing proposals.
1.23 Acceptance of Proposals
This Request for Proposal should not be construed as an agreement to purchase goods or services.
Although project costs will be a heavily weighted factor, the GC and or HAP are not bound to enter into a
Contract with the Contractor who submits the lowest priced proposal or with any Contractor. Neither
acceptance of a proposal nor execution of a Contract will constitute approval of any activity or
development contemplated in any proposal that requires any approval, permit or license pursuant to any
federal, state, or
municipal statute, regulation or by-law.
1.24 Liability for Errors
While the GC and HAP will use considerable efforts to ensure an accurate representation of information
in this Request for Proposal, the information contained in this Request for Proposal is supplied solely as a
guideline for Contractors. The information is not guaranteed or warranted to be comprehensive or
exhaustive. Nothing in this pricing request document is intended to relieve Contractors from forming their
own opinions and conclusions with respect to the matters addressed in this request for bid
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 7
1.25 Modifications of Terms
HAP reserves the right to modify the terms of this Request for Proposal at any time at its sole discretion.
This includes the right to cancel this Request for Proposal at any time prior to entering into a Contract
with the successful Contractor.
1.26 Ownership of Proposals and Public Disclosure
All documents, including proposals, submitted to the Town become the property of HAP.
1.27 Patents
The proposer shall hold and save the Town of Montville and its officers, agents, servants, and employees
harmless from liability of any nature or kind, including cost and expenses for, or on account of, any
patented or unpatented invention, process, article, or appliance manufactured or used in the performance
of the contract, including its use by HAP, unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the proposal
documents.
1.28 Payments
1. HAP will make such payments to the proposer not less than 30 days following the approval of an
invoice submitted for service provided.
2. HAP is exempt from the payment of excise taxes imposed by the Federal Government, and the Sales
and Use tax of the State of MA, under State Statue 12-412, such taxes should not be included in the
proposal price.
1.29 Non-Collusive Proposal Statement
All proposers shall be required to provide a signed non-collusive statement
(Attachment B) with all the public proposals as follows:
a. The proposal has been arrived at by the proposer independently and has been submitted without
collusion with, and without any agreement, understanding, or planned common course of action with, any
other vendor of materials, supplies, equipment or services described in the Legal Notice for Proposals,
designed to limit independent proposals or competition.
b. The contents of the proposal have not been communicated by the proposer or their employees or
agents to any person not an employee or agent of the proposer or its surety on any bond furnished with
the proposal, and will not be communicated to any such person prior to the official opening of the
proposal.
2 System Requirements
2.1 Current Environment New Construction
2.2 Summary of Proposed Telephone System Requirements
The HAP Live 155 intends to deploy an IP telephone system consisting of the following primary elements:
IP telephone system, including all necessary server components will
155 Pleasant Street, Northampton, MA
70 IP Telephones Bundles with base and Dect unit
5IP Telephones at the HAP office
1 IP Teleconferencing Telephones.
The system to be installed should be capable of expansion in terms of additional IP telephones, and
Analog Ports. Upon completion the systems installed will perform as a single system and include the
following functionality:
A coordinated dialing scheme - The dialing scheme will facilitate calling among all extensions. The
numbering plan will allow users at any extension to dial any other extension on the network by dialing a 3-
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 8
digit extension number. The system will recognize the number dialed and route the call appropriately.
Departments and Users will keep existing extension numbers where possible.
Network-wide automatic route selection – The system shall have the ability to route calls from any
extension via the most appropriate available facilities system-wide.
Centralized attendant service - Incoming main number calls directed to any site shall be able to be to
be answered and processed from any location.
Incoming call routing - Incoming calls to main listed numbers or DID numbers shall be able to be routed
to attendant positions or extensions, regardless of the number dialed, based upon time of day, day of
week, attendant availability, or other parameters.
Feature transparency - System features shall be able to be employed transparently across the network.
Calling number/name display on sets – Telephones with displays and attendant consoles will have the
ability to display the extension number and the name of the individual of the originating extension of any
call placed between any extensions on the network. The feature will further apply to call routing
information when calls are forwarded or transferred between extensions on the network.
Networked messaging system – All sites on the network will be served by a single voice messaging
system or multiple systems capable of full integration to act as a single messaging system. Full
integration between the messaging system and the telephone system must extend to all extensions.
Number portability – Any extension number in HAP’s numbering range must be able to operate at the
building. There should be no requirement to dedicate certain number blocks to specific nodes.
System administration – The telephone system and peripheral systems must be configured to allow all
nodes to be administered from one or more LAN-based workstations that may be located anywhere on
the network, or from secure remote locations. Minimum system administration functionality is defined in
the System Management and Administration section of this document.
Call Accounting and Reporting
IP Duress Call Features
· The capability to initiate a "Silent Duress" call and escalate to the appropriate security person(s),
local or remote
· Location identification by handset location.
· Deployment of a front line link to first responder.
· Not an all or nothing feature, can be deployed to selected phones.
· Work on all phones, IP and analog.
All components shall be new, no refurbished components will be considered. Contractors shall submit a
detailed design and configuration diagram indicating the specific components in each building and floor,
and the connectivity among components for their proposed system with their bids.
2.3 Telephone System Life Cycle
The anticipated operating life cycle of the proposed system must be at least seven (7) years. Contractors
must guarantee support for their proposed systems for the entire system life cycle. Said support must
encompass the following:
Maintenance
Spare Parts
System administration and reconfiguration
Hardware and software upgrades
Documentation updates
Training/retraining
2.4 Proposed Telephone System Location
Contractors shall provide a proposed equipment rack layout for all required equipment spaces and wiring
closets. Contractors shall provide the physical and environmental parameters for all switching equipment
and ancillary systems. Contractors shall install its equipment in available space in existing 19” equipment
racks in room 212, or supply a new rack to support its equipment if there is inadequate space in the
existing rack. Contractors shall state the precise preparation requirements needed to accommodate the
system, including:
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 9
Space requirements in rack units
Thermal dissipation (BTU/hour)
Power requirements: voltage/current rating and receptacle type per component
Temperature/humidity operating range
Wall/floor/ceiling surface requirements
Lighting requirements
2.5 Telephone System Standards
The proposed system must adhere to current and proposed industry
standards as they pertain to VoIP. Discuss your system’s support for such
standards, including, at a minimum, the following:
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
H.323 suite of standards for multimedia communications over IP
Media encoding standards (G711, G729)
QoS prioritization (802.1Q, 802.1p, Diffserv)
Web Services/Services Oriented Architecture
Enhanced 911 – Provide detailed ALI information beyond the ALI assigned to the trunk being used to
call 911.
Discuss these and other relevant standards that apply to VoIP, specifically as they pertain to your
proposed solution, and how the Town may benefit from your implementation of these standards.
2.6 Security
The system shall be secure and possess mechanisms to protect critical tables, databases, and operating
systems. Access to the system by Town operations personnel and the service provider should be
controlled through the use of passwords and other appropriate security measures to prevent unauthorized
alteration or destruction of critical tables, databases, programs, etc.
2.7 Telephone System Station Equipment
HAP will deploy a configuration of primarily IP telephones, with limited use of analog telephones. Power
to IP telephones shall be provided by PoE switches to be provided by the contractor.
Stations shall be ADA compliant and hearing aid adaptable. Contractors must provide a listing of each
type of telephone instrument available and the add/delete price for each model. These add/delete prices
will be used during station review process to determine any incremental costs/cost reductions resulting
from the station reviews. The unit cost will apply until system cutover. The system will be required to
support, at a minimum, the following telephone type:
IP telephone set equipped with multiple, fixed and programmable line appearance keys, feature keys,
displays of adequate size and resolution to allow users to take advantage of set-based applications, and
speakerphones.
The default IP Telephone set will be equipped with at a minimum:
24 programmable buttons or soft keys
At least the following fixed function keys:
· Mute
· Menu
· Cancel
· Redial
· Transfer/Conference
· Message
· Volume up
· Volume down
· Speaker
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 10
Dual Ethernet Port (other devices such as computer workstation can be daisy chained off of phone)
The default Analog Telephone set will be equipped with at a minimum:
8 programmable buttons or soft keys
At least the following fixed function keys:
· Redial
· Mute
· Transfer
· Conference
· Hold
· Message
· Volume up
· Volume down
· Speaker
The cordless IP telephone sets will be equipped with at a minimum:
Wired Base Station
Speaker Phone
Call Hold/Forward/Transfer
Contractors shall submit the following information to describe the proposed
IP telephone sets.
Functionality – Describe the features standard to each set, including capacity (# of line appearance keys,
# of simultaneous calls), features, hard keys, soft keys, ease of use
Display – Describe the display, including size (length and width), resolution (pixels), and the number of
lines and characters that can be displayed.
Describe what is displayed during various operations (while on hook, while off hook, while dialing a call,
while on a call, while initiating a conference or transfer). Describe other display functionality including call
logs, speed dial lists, directory(s), etc.
Applications – Describe the applications that can be accessed via the IP set. Describe the applications
that are included in your proposal pricing and any additional applications that are currently deliverable.
Identify whether the system includes an application development tool that allows the development of
additional applications, and the standards that are supported (HTML, XML, etc.).
Headset Support – Describe the ability of the proposed sets to support wired and wireless headsets.
Describe whether the sets have headset jacks.
Describe whether the sets support Bluetooth wireless headsets, and whether an outboard appliance is
required.
Power Consumption – Identify the power required to serve each IP telephone set in WATTS. Identify the
power requirements in an on hook condition, off hook condition, and during call setup.
Consoles – PC-based console with capabilities to monitor line status/presence, transfer calls to an
extension, and transfer calls to voice mail. No PC-based consoles should be provided in the base price.
Analog single line telephone sets - The system shall support the connection of analog devices such as
analog telephones, fax machines, credit card authorization devices, and modems.
Softphones – software supporting telephone service integrated into a PC, with no physical telephone
set. No softphones shall be included in the base price.
Cordless telephones.
Contractors must provide a description and photographs of the entire family of telephone instruments that
may be used on their proposed system, identifying instrument size, fixed and assignable button
appearances and features, and color selections.
2.8 Station Reviews
The exact quantity, type and configuration of telephone instruments to be installed will be determined as a
result of detailed station reviews to be conducted by the successful Contractor, with assistance from HAP.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 11
Station reviews shall include on-site meetings with representatives from HAP to determine the
requirements, and properly apply the capabilities of the new system to each station. HAP requires that the
successful Contractor physically visit and interview representatives from HAP at the site in order to
understand the configuration and operation and to complete the system configuration.
2.9 Desktop Integration
Contractors shall submit descriptions of the desktop integration features available in their systems.
Include in this discussion the following, at a minimum:
Ability for users to manage telephone feature configuration from the desktop
Ability for users to manage voice mailboxes from the desktop
LDAP Integration
Presence and status features
Ability to do “click-to-dial” by mouse-clicking a telephone number listed in a directory, embedded in an
email or website, document or other source
Ability to access voice mail messages from the desktop
2.10 Mobility
Contractors shall describe the ability of their proposed systems to support mobile workers, including the
following.
2.10.1 Telecommuters
For employees that may work remotely, regardless of frequency, the system should have the ability for
those workers to make and receive calls as if the worker was in the office. HAP envisions functionality
allowing workers to “log in” from a remote site, using an IP telephone or softphone client. This
functionality shall provide all the capabilities that the worker would enjoy if he/she was at his/her office.
When activated, incoming calls to the worker’s extension shall ring at the remote site, and provide all the
information (caller ID, for example) and feature access (call transfer, conference, for example) that the
worker has when working from the office. Also when activated, outgoing calls shall access the HAP
network (PSTN) facilities and shall be captured and reported on by the call accounting system, should a
call accounting system be implemented. The worker shall be part of the HAP extension dial plan when
this feature is activated.
Contractors shall submit a detailed description of the mobility functionality included in their proposals to
support telecommuters, and also provide a description of other telecommuter capabilities available with
the proposed solution. Contractors shall submit details regarding the client software. Contractors will
provide unit pricing for this functionality.
2.10.2 Cellular Telephone Integration
Describe the capability for cell phone-to-desktop phone integration to support mobile staff. This capability
is not to be confused with simple call forwarding to a cell phone. The preferred capability is that office
extensions can be extended to a cell phone, without the caller knowing that the call is being extended.
Contractors shall describe this functionality in detail, including any necessary hardware or software, the
process by which the feature can be activated locally and remotely, and costs. Contractors will provide
unit pricing for this functionality.
2.10.3 Hot-Desking
Describe the capability for users to log in to an IP phone other than his/her desktop telephone. The
desired capability is that a user may log-in to an alternate telephone, and that alternate telephone takes
on the extension number and all the characteristics and configuration of the user’s desktop telephone.
Contractors shall describe this functionality in detail, including any necessary hardware or software, the
process by which the feature can be activated and deactivated, and costs. Contractors will provide unit
pricing for this functionality.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 12
2.11 Network Services
The system must support interconnection to a wide complement of network services, including the
following:
Loop start and ground start central office trunks
T-1
ISDN PRI & BRI
10/100/1000 Ethernet (gigabit Ethernet link required for LAN and WAN connectivity)
2.12 Features and Capabilities
Contractors shall provide a complete list and description of all system and station features available with
the proposed system. The Town will evaluate the system and user feature sets based upon the
applicability of the features to HAP requirements, the ease of use of the features, the ease of
management, configuration and reconfiguration of the features, whether features are standard or optional,
and costs.
The Contractor shall describe which features and settings can be controlled, configured and reconfigured
by end users, which are controlled by the system administrator, and the level of flexibility that the system
administrator has to allow or disallow end user control. The Contractor shall describe the tools available
to end users to control, configure or reconfigure features and settings.
2.13 System Administration and Management
System administration and management tools shall be provided to enable HAP to manage the system.
The proposed system shall include the hardware, all required software, programming, and the necessary
link to the telephone system. The system shall be able to be accessed via the HAP network and remotely
via VPN or web portal, with appropriate security. As a minimum, the system must support the following:
2.13.1 Moves, Additions and Changes
The system shall provide a means for the Town to perform moves, additions, and changes in real time, or
on a scheduled basis.
2.13.2 Class of Service Definition and Maintenance
The system shall provide a means for the Town to assign classes of service which define the set of
privileges and features available for each station. The system shall also provide a means for the Town to
create new classes of service as the need arises. Contractors shall identify the number of classes of
service that the system will support.
2.13.3 Control of Network Services
The system shall allow the Town to exercise access to and control over network services attached to the
system.
2.13.4 System Performance Monitoring and Reporting
The proposed system shall be equipped with all necessary hardware and software to monitor system
performance, generate alarms, conduct diagnostic tests, and create reports providing summary and
detailed history of the system performance. Contractors shall describe all conditions and parameters that
are monitored and reported on. Selected conditions and parameters that shall be included are:
Voice quality on the IP network
Security (reporting on security breaches, attempted security breaches)
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 13
Resource utilization
Alarms and actions taken
Trunk utilization
Nothing in Section 2.13 is intended to absolve the selected Contractor of any of its responsibilities to
develop and load all initial databases, perform MAC work, monitor system performance, respond to
alarms, and otherwise conduct preventive and responsive maintenance in compliance with the terms of
the warranty or any future maintenance agreements.
2.14 Voice Mail/Unified Messaging System
2.14.1 General
Contractors shall propose a voice mail system. For the initial installation, the system shall be sized to
support the required number of current users and include the following functionality at a minimum:
Forward to email.
Password protected mailboxes.
Record a call to voice mail.
Email Delivery.
As more sites are added, the Town must be able to add ports and storage to meet their requirements.
Contractors shall identify the maximum capacities of their proposed system and any thresholds that will
require additional investment, such as a larger server.
Contractors shall submit a complete description of their voice mail system.
Include a list and description of all features and functions of the system, and state whether they are
standard or optional.
2.14.2 Integration with Telephone System
The voice mail system must be fully and transparently integrated with the proposed telephone system.
Integration capabilities shall include, at a minimum:
Lighting message waiting indicator on telephone sets.
Providing stutter dial tone on sets not equipped with a message waiting indicator.
Forwarding of calls to personal greeting.
Transfer of calls directly to a voice mailbox.
Transfer of calls from a coverage point directly to the mailbox of the originally intended destination.
Out-calling.
2.14.3 Desktop Integration
Contractors shall describe the ability of the voice mail system to integrate with desktop PC’s, smart
phones and other devices. Desirable features include:
Inbox-style display of voice mail messages.
Ability to manage voice mail messages from desktop (select individual messages, listen, save, delete,
forward, forward with annotation, fast forward, reverse).
Ability to manage user mailbox from the desktop (select/change
greeting, change number of rings before forward to mailbox).
2.14.4 Automated Attendant
The voice mail system shall include automated multi-level attendant functionality. Calls made to specific
numbers may, at the discretion of HAP, receive a recorded announcement followed by a menu of choices
(press ‘1’ for Main Office, ‘2’ for Guidance, etc.).
HAP shall have the ability to pre-record multiple automated attendant greetings that may be activated on
a scheduled basis or on demand by secure access from any telephone or PC on the Town network,
remotely via VPN, or via a secure web portal.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 14
The Town shall have the ability to record and activate new messages in real time to react to specific
situations such as weather delays.
2.15 System Paging Requirements
The system will have the paging ability and shall include the following functionality.
Ability for a user with proper permissions and security to page from a telephone system handset to a
single IP Telephone, a group of IP Telephones, or all Telephones.
Ability to “talk back”. When a user pages an IP telephone, the user at the receiving end of the page
should be able to respond either by talking back to the microphone built in to the phone, or to pick up the
telephone handset to have a private conversation.
Optional Ability for stand-alone IP speakers, or loudspeaker
integration within areas not within earshot of IP phones such as
hallways within the town hall.
2.16 Call Accounting System
All proposals must include a call accounting system integrated with the telephone system. The call
accounting system must be fully and transparently integrated with the proposed telephone system. The
call accounting system shall perform, at a minimum, the following functions:
1. Logging of all incoming and outgoing PSTN calls.
2. Caller ID / ANI tracking of incoming calls through multiple internal transfers.
3. Summary reports by individual station or groups of stations including costing.
4. Summary reports by date/time period(s).
5. Summary reports by individual trunk(s) or line(s).
6. Summary reports by calling and called number(s).
7. Call history search based on phone extension, calling number, called number, date, and/or time.
8. A graphical user interface (GUI) for all administrative, searching, and reporting functions.
9. Optional, set real-time alarms to detect toll fraud and generate reports that detail telecom misuse.
The Call Accounting System must meet capacity requirements for the newly installed system as well as
capacity for growth.
2.17 Public Safety Phone System Interoperability
The newly installed phone system should have the ability to interoperate with the phone system at the
Public Safety Building.
Three-digit dialing
System Fail Over/Resiliency, in the event either controller goes off line the controller at the other site
will assume control. When the faulty controller returns to an on-line status the system (phones) will fail
back to original controller.
PRI Fail Over/Resiliency, maintain service continuity if either PRI circuit is interrupted.
Integration into call accounting system
2.18 Cable/Termination Requirements and Specifications
Cabling for IP phones will be reworked or newly installed as necessary. Whether reworked on newly
installed the following applies:
All cables shall be installed/tested or reworked/tested to TIA/EIA-568-C, specifications and standards.
Test all UTP cabling for Wire Map, Cable Length, Insertion Loss, Near End Cross Talk (NEXT), Power
Sum Near End Cross Talk (PSNEXT), Equal Level Far End Cross Talk (ELFEXT), Power Sum Equal
Level Far End Crosstalk (PSELFEXT), Return Loss, Propagation Delay, Delay Skew, DC Loop
Resistance, and provide a
detailed report of all cable tests. Labeling of all work area faceplates/outlets, cables, patch cords,
terminations, patch panels and port identifiers shall be in accordance with
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 15
ANSI/TIA-606-B.
3. Warranty, Maintenance & Post-Installation Support
3.1 Design and Operation
Contractor shall warrant that the equipment, components, and services sold or provided in response to
this request for bid will perform in accordance with their respective design specifications, and will operate
in accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications when operated and maintained in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for a minimum of seven (7) years from
Acceptance. This represents the anticipated life cycle of the proposed system.
3.2 Configurations
Contractor shall warrant that the configurations of equipment and services proposed in response to this
RFP represent sound design principles being applied to provide a total system solution to the
requirements stated in the request for bid, and that the equipment and services provided will operate
together in a manner to perform the functions expressed in the request for bid.
3.3 Equipment Models
Contractor shall warrant that the equipment offered is standard new equipment, and the latest model of
regular stock product, with parts regularly used for the type of equipment offered; also that no attachment
or part has been substituted or applied contrary to manufacturer's recommendations and standard
practice. Contractor shall furnish the current version of software for all systems provided. If a new version
or release is issued after contract execution, but prior to the shipment of the system, then
the Town shall have the option of substituting the new version or release in
place of the originally proposed version or release, at no additional charge.
3.4 Product Life Cycle
Contractor shall warrant that the components offered are not currently at or near the end of their product
life cycle. Contractors shall submit a statement identifying the length of time from cutover that Contractors
will guarantee new parts availability and manufacturer support.
3.5 Current Installations and Demonstrations
The Contractor warrants that all of the equipment and software proposed must be currently installed in a
user environment and able to be demonstrated. Experimental or unannounced equipment or software will
not be acceptable unless specifically stipulated by HAP.
3.6 Warranty Coverage
The Contractor warrants that the system as priced, including all hardware and software, will include a
complete warranty covering all parts, labor, software updates, travel and all other expenses, for a period
of a minimum of one (1) year from final Acceptance. The Contractor will serve as a single point of contact,
and provide the name, address and telephone number of the individual to contact when maintenance is
required. The Contractor shall further provide escalation procedures and contact names and numbers to
be used when normal maintenance procedures are not adequate to resolve problems.
3.7 Equipment Replacement
During the warranty period, any equipment that must be replaced as a result of conditions covered under
warranty will be replaced with new equipment
of the same make and model.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 16
3.8 Maintenance during Warranty
During the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide maintenance services on a 7x24 basis. The
Contractor will respond to major failures within four (4) hours. Response time is defined as the amount of
time for a qualified technician to arrive on the HAP site. For the purposes of warranty and maintenance, a
major failure is defined as any failure that affects the following:
20% of station equipment out of service
20% of network services out of service
The failure of any peripheral system (messaging, system administration, etc.)
Deterioration of voice quality to an average of below a MOS of 3.8
Failure of any integration functionality between systems installed under this contract, or between
systems installed under this contract and other existing systems
Any failure whatsoever which substantially impedes the HAP’s ability to operate, as determined solely
by HAP.
3.9 Routine Repairs
During the warranty period, and during any subsequent maintenance agreements, other routine repairs
will be completed before the end of the next business day.
3.10 End of Warranty Period
After the warranty has expired, HAP may elect to enter into service and maintenance agreements with the
selected Contractor. During any such maintenance agreements, the Contractor shall provide
maintenance services on a 7x24 basis under the same terms as the initial warranty as described in
Section 3.8. Maintenance shall include all parts and labor, monitoring the system for alarm conditions and
responding to such alarms, software upgrades necessary to keep the system compliant with
manufacturer support requirements, travel and all other expenses necessary to support the system.
The Contractor will respond to Major Failures as defined in Section 3.8 within four (4) hours. Response
time is defined as the amount of time for a qualified technician to arrive on the Town’s site from the time
that HAP initiates a call for service. Contractors shall describe the processes used for initiating and
tracking trouble tickets (i.e., web portal, telephone, etc.), and how the Town will be able to track trouble
tickets.
HAP will evaluate life cycle costs for an expected life of seven (7) years. Contractors shall provide post-
warranty maintenance pricing on an annual basis. Contractors may submit guaranteed pricing for as
many years as they wish. Otherwise, HAP will assume that maintenance costs will increase 3% annually
in determining total life cycle costs.
3.11 System Failure
In the event of a major system failure, whether due to circumstances covered under warranty or
maintenance agreement, or due to Acts of God or nature, or any other cause, the Contractor will have a
replacement system readily available, which can be installed and operational within 48 hours to provide
rudimentary telephone service to HAP.
3.12 Preventative Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide performance monitoring of the system primary components and peripheral
systems as part of the initial warranty and any subsequent maintenance agreements. If this function is
optional, provide pricing separately.
3.13 Performance Monitoring
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 17
The Contractor shall provide performance monitoring of the system primary components and peripheral
systems as part of the initial warranty and any subsequent maintenance agreements. If this function is
optional, provide pricing separately.
3.14 Remote Diagnostics
The Contractor shall have a remote diagnostics and maintenance capability that permits the Contractor to
monitor system performance, and perform routine diagnostics and maintenance from a remote
maintenance facility, and will identify the location and capabilities of this facility. If this function is optional,
provide pricing separately.
4 Scope of Services
4.1 Implementation Planning
Following the notice of award and contract negotiations, the Contractor will immediately develop a
detailed phasing and implementation plan and schedule for all aspects of the systems implementation
including:
Telephone system common equipment (servers, routers, gateways)
Voice mail system
Call accounting
System configuration and development of all required databases for telephone system and intercom
system
All station equipment and end devices (handsets and speakers), including station reviews, set
configuration, set labeling, placement, tone and test and interconnection
System administration application
Integration of telephone system
Interconnection to PSTN
Interconnection and integration with the Town WAN and LAN
Interconnection of IP telephones and peripheral devices to the HAP LAN
Furnishing and installation of required cross-connects and/or patch cords to provide complete
connectivity from telephone system common equipment to station equipment
Testing of all system functionality, as described in Section 4.8 below
Delivery of system documentation, as described in Section 4.9 below
Training per the requirements stated in Section 5 of this RFP
4.2 Equipment Delivery and Storage
The Contractor is responsible for the safe transport, rigging, moving and shipping of all components to
their final installation location. All components shall be delivered directly to their final installation location.
The Contractor will provide the HAP with an itemized accounting of each item of equipment upon delivery
to Town premises pursuant to the final negotiated contract. Only HAP personnel who are designated and
authorized by the Town to receive delivery shall be the recipients of those deliveries, and only the
signatures of those designated staff members shall be accepted upon the receipts.
4.3 Site Preparation
Unless otherwise specified, the Town will perform any necessary site preparation (space preparation,
power enhancements, lighting, cooling, backboards, and any other construction). Site inspections shall be
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 18
performed by the Contractor prior to delivery and installation to ensure that all required site preparation
items have been completed satisfactorily at the HAP facility. The site inspections will be coordinated and
scheduled with HAP staff. The Contractor shall provide all site requirements with its proposal.
The Contractor will certify that the sites are suitable for the system following this inspection.
4.4 Regulations
All work and materials shall comply with all federal and state laws, municipal ordinances, regulations and
directions of inspectors appointed by proper authorities. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all
permits and licenses required for the performance of the work, and shall post all notices required by law.
4.5 Payment of Material and Services
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, tools, equipment,
transportation, and other facilities necessary for the performance and completion of the work. The
Contractor shall verify conditions at the facility, including door openings and passages. Any and all
special handling requirements shall be provided and paid for by the Contractor.
4.6 Premises
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages to the structure or property of HAP caused by the
Contractor, or any subcontractor or other direct or indirect employee of the Contractor throughout the
course of this installation. Throughout the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the work area
free from debris of all types, and remove from the premises all rubbish resulting from any work being
performed by him on a daily basis. At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall leave the
premises in a clean and finished condition.
4.7 Burn-in Testing
The Contractor shall perform factory burn-in tests of all hardware for a
period of three (3) days prior to shipment of the system to the Town. Town
personnel shall have the option to witness such tests.
4.8 Project Completion
The Contractor shall acknowledge that successful completion of this project shall include the installation,
testing, and Acceptance, following a successful Performance Period as described below, by the following
Acceptance Criteria:
Prior to Acceptance by HAP, the Contractor shall be responsible for performing testing and inspections to
verify that the installation and all equipment and materials are performing in compliance with the
manufacturer's specifications. HAP personnel shall have the option of witnessing the testing.
At a minimum, pre-cutover functional tests as part of the acceptance test plan shall include:
All required operator and system features for each installed system, subsystem and station
Placement and reception of test calls under a variety of conditions: busy, no answer, call forward, etc.
Tests to correctly place and receive calls via connected common carrier facilities
Voice quality tests
Integration between Town Hall and Public Safety IP telephone systems
Administrative and maintenance subsystem capabilities
Demonstration of acceptable performance in the presence of traffic overloads
Demonstration of automatic fault detection, survivability and recovery following artificially-induced
failures of each subsystem
Upon demonstration of the completion of successful testing and inspection by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall perform the system cutover based on the schedule and plan described in Section 4.1.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 19
Upon satisfactory completion of the cutover, a Performance Period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar
days shall commence. The Performance Period is defined as 30 consecutive calendar days of operating
in accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications, subsequent to testing and inspection.
If a Major Failure (as defined in Section 3.8 above) occurs during the Performance Period, the Contractor
shall remedy the problem in accordance with manufacturer's published specifications, and the
Performance Period shall recommence. Upon successful completion of the Performance Period, and
within three business days, the Town and the Contractor shall meet to confirm Acceptance, and the Final
Acceptance Form shall be executed. If a successful Performance Period cannot be accomplished within
ninety (90) calendar days after commencement of the first Performance Period, HAP reserves the right to
find the Contractor in default, and terminate the Contract. In that event, the Contractor shall remove the
equipment, and HAP Town shall not be responsible for any payment whatsoever to the Contractor,
except for any materials left in place and elected to be reused by HAP.
4.9 Documentation
The Contractor shall provide two (2) complete sets of technical documentation including system manuals,
technical specifications, as-built drawings (hard copy and electronic using AutoCAD or Visio), and a
complete inventory of all components, including at least the serial number, model number, manufacturer,
description, and location installed. The inventory database shall be provided in electronic format
agreeable to HAP.
5 Training Requirements
5.1 End User Training
The Contractor shall supply complete station user training for all station equipment types and other end
user equipment, for all station users, utilizing live equipment, within two weeks prior to system cutover, at
no cost to HAP. HAP will provide appropriate space and assist in scheduling of classes for station user
training. Each user will be provided with written training materials for his/her telephone station equipment.
In addition, a supply of training materials/user guides shall be provided to HAP for future use. User guides
shall also be made available on line.
5.2 System Administration Training
The Contractor shall supply complete training for a minimum of two (2) persons on the operation of the
system management and administration functions, within two weeks prior to the system cutover, at no
cost to HAP. Training will be provided on all primary and peripheral systems and services installed under
this contract.
5.3 Certified System Specialist Training
The Contractor shall provide pricing for the training necessary for HAP to assume responsibility for
system maintenance, should HAP choose to do so after the warranty period has expired, for all primary
and peripheral systems and services installed under this contract. Training will be adequate for personnel
to become "certified" system technicians and/or administrators. Provide pricing exclusive of travel and out
of pocket expenses. Provide the locations where training is conducted. Identify available training courses,
syllabuses and schedules, and provide pricing for on-going training and re-certification programs.
5.4 Post-Cutover Training
“Train the Trainer” or equivalent training shall be provided at no cost to up to three (3) staff. The
Contractor shall provide the materials and support necessary for the HAP to provide training on an
ongoing basis to new employees and refresher training to existing employees. Provide descriptions of all
training programs available, length of classes, and quantities of individuals per class. Provide copies of
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+Lda
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
272000 - 20
training materials. Training materials and manuals should be available for download to HAP via the
Internet.
6 Pricing Proposal
6.1 Pricing Format
Pricing for the proposed system must be provided in summary format on the table in Section 6.7, and in
detail, by individual component or chargeable item, on the attached detailed spreadsheets (Attachment
3). Each chargeable item of equipment, hardware or software must be listed. The unit purchase and
installation prices must apply from the date of contract until cutover. Add-on unit prices must apply for
one full year after final Acceptance.
6.2 Life Cycle Cost Comparison
HAP will develop a total seven (7) year life cycle cost for the proposed systems, and use this as the
methodology for cost comparison among the proposals. The calculation will include:
All acquisition/purchase costs for the proposed system
All installation costs for the proposed system
All design, configuration, project management and professional services costs for the proposed system
and all subsystems
All annual post-warranty maintenance costs. Contractors shall provide post-warranty maintenance pricing
per the requirements stated in Section 3 of the request for bid on an annual basis. Contractors may
submit guaranteed pricing for as many years as they wish. Otherwise, HAP will assume that maintenance
costs will increase 3% annually in determining total life cycle costs. Annual maintenance costs may not
increase by more than the Consumer Price Index.
6.3 Approximation of Quantities
The quantities given in the proposal are approximate only, being given as a basis for the uniform
comparison of proposals, HAP does not expressly or by implication agree that the actual amount of work
will correspond therewith. An increase or decrease in the quantity for any unit price item shall not be
regarded as sufficient grounds for an increase or decrease in the unit price of that item, nor in the time
allowed for the completion of the work.
6.4 Pricing Timeframe
It is required that all pricing and provisions of the Contractor's proposal remain in effect for a minimum of
90 days from the submittal date or the completion of negotiations, whichever is the latest.
6.5 Authorized Signature
Proposals must be signed below by a representative of the Contractor authorized to commit the
Contractor to the quoted price and all of the terms and requirements stated in the request for bid.
Contractor’s signature below signifies compliance with all the terms and requirements of the request for
bid.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 1
SECTION 281000
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the
Specifications.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
1. Electronic Access Control
B. Related sections
1. 28 13 00 Access Control
2. 28 13 33 Access Control Interfaces
C. Products
1. A PaxLock Electronic Lock for enhancing security at a facility.
2. Paxton Access Control software for programming, configuring, maintaining and
monitoring the Electronic Locks.
3. Paxton wireless bridges to allow for wireless communication of events and Lock settings
between the Access Control software and the Electronic Locks.
D. System
1. The above products combined shall form a Paxton Access Control System (ACS) that
meets all of the requirements specified in this document.
2. The ACS shall allow the PaxLocks to use all of its features as well as provide the
additional features listed in this specification.
3. The ACS shall be scalable, allowing for additional Electronic Locks and other access
control hardware from the same manufacturer without requiring change or affecting
functionality of existing Electronic Locks.
4. The system shall require a Server which shall store the access control database,
containing user and hardware information and configuration settings.
a. The Server can be a robust standard desktop PC running the access control
software.
1.3 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
E. Electronic Locks shall be installed on doors within the site to provide access control
except exit doors to the outside of the building.
F. The Electronic Locks shall meet the access control requirements of the project.
G. The Electronic Locks shall be installed into the site with the Paxton access control system
for exit doors to the outside of the building.
H. The Electronic Locks shall be installed with additional Paxton access control hardware
and software to form a complete access control solution.
I. Overall Electronic Lock capability
1. The Electronic Lock shall provide a wireless solution to access control.
2. The Electronic Lock shall be capable of controlling a single entry point and expanding
one door at a time, up to a minimum of 1000.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 2
3. Each Electronic Lock shall be able to manage the hardware necessary to secure one
door.
4. Each Electronic Lock shall provide access control in a single direction and provide free
access in the other direction.
J. Access control equipment provided by the manufacturer shall be ‘plug-and-play’, allowing
for quick and simple installation.
K. Components of the Electronic Lock:
1. Hardware, which shall consist of a wireless, battery powered, Electronic Lock, which shall
provide control and monitoring of an access point.
2. Communication shall consist of a wireless router provided by the ACS manufacturer,
allowing the Electronic Lock to communicate with the access control software.
L. The Electronic Lock shall provide the following as a minimum:
1. Access Control.
2. Door state monitoring (Door forced, Door left open).
3. Event reporting to the access control software.
4. Wireless communication with the access control software.
5. License free configuration and monitoring software and lifetime updates at no charge.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Access Control Unit (ACU): An intelligent peripheral control unit that provides the
interface between the Management and Monitoring Subsystem and the devices installed
at the access portal for the purpose of restricting access and monitoring the portal status.
B. Reader: A proximity reader or biometric reader that captures the credential information
and passes it to the ACU for processing.
C. LAN: Local area network.
D. PC: Personal computer, used as the Central Station, workstations, and file servers.
E. Token: The electronic credential issued to a person. This device contains the encoded
number that is used to determine if access will be granted or denied.
F. IP: Internet Protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.
G. TCP: Transport Control Protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.
H. USB: Universal Serial Bus.
I. WAN: Wide area network.
J. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation.
K. Workstation: A PC with software that is configured for specific limited security system
functions.
L. DDA compliant: Abides by the Disability Discrimination Act.
M. PoE: Power over Ethernet.
N. Open air: Without obstruction or interference.
O. Server: A PC that contains the database of users and access control settings, which runs
the access control software.
1.5 ACCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTION
A. General
1. Users shall be identified and processed through the means of:
a. Presenting a token to a reader.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 3
2. The system shall not use facility codes for card credentials. Each token/credential shall
have a unique 40 bit encryption for high security.
3. The system shall provide for unique card serial numbers, so the user will not need to
determine the next sequence of cards to purchase.
B. Access Control Software
1. The Electronic Lock shall be configurable using software provided by the manufacturer.
a. This software will have been included with the Electronic Lock at no additional cost.
b. This shall be the same software as used for the existing access control hardware.
2. The software shall feature:
a. A graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu tree format that
complies with interface guidelines of Microsoft Windows operating system.
3. System license shall be for the entire system and shall include capability for future
additions that are within the indicated system size limits specified in this Section. There
shall be no license fee or yearly renewal fees.
4. Access shall be restricted using password-protected operator login.
5. The software at a minimum shall support the following operating systems:
a. Windows XP
b. Windows 7
c. Windows Vista Business
d. Windows Server 2003 & 2008
e. Windows 8 & Windows 8.1
6. Number of PCs required
a. There shall not be a limit to the number of PCs that can run the configuration
software. (Limits shall be placed based on the SQL licensing.)
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment used shall be covered by a manufacturer’s warranty for a minimum of 5 years.
The following aspects shall be covered:
1. Electrical
2. Electronic
3. Component
4. Mechanical
B. Equipment used shall be provided with firmware upgrades from the manufacturer free of
charge.
C. Any change made in the software shall automatically be sent to the Electronic Lock when it is
next online.
D. Access control system capabilities shall be at a minimum:
1. 1000 access points
2. 50,000 users/tokens
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The ACS vendor shall offer a 5-year non-prorated warranty to cover the Electronic Lock
components and include all software upgrades.
1.8 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The ACS must interact with other physical parts of the facility and any construction either new
or remodelled.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 4
B. When determining locations for placement of access control devices, the installer shall follow
all appropriate building codes and laws concerning life safety and construction.
1.9 COMPLIANCE
A. All Electronic Locks shall comply with the following standards:
1. IPX4 for Moisture resistance
2. ANSI/UL 10C for Fire resistance (20 min fire doors)
3. CAN/ULC S104 for Fire resistance (20 min fire doors)
4. FCC rule part 2.1093 and KDB 447498 D01 for portable RF exposure
5. UL 294
6. CSA C22.2 NO. 205-12
7. Part 15 of the FCC Rules
8. FCC Part 15 Subpart C for Intentional Radiators
9. Industry Canada RSS-210 for licence-exempt Radio Apparatus
B. All wireless bridges shall comply with the following standards:
1. ETSI EN 300 328 for wireless transmission
2. IEC/EN 60950-1 for indoor safety
3. FCC Part 15 Subpart C for Intentional Radiators
4. EN 301-489 for Radio Apparatus
5. UL 294
1.10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FUNCTIONALITY
A. Through use of an Electronic Lock, it shall be possible to control access through a door:
1. A token holder shall be able to present their token to the door handle to gain valid
access.
2. Presentation of an invalid credential shall not allow access.
3. Users shall always be permitted exit.
B. The Electronic Lock shall include key override functionality
1. 2 keys shall be provided at no extra cost.
2. It shall be possible to unlock the door using a key, regardless of the Electronic Locks
configuration
3. It shall be possible to unlock the door using a key, regardless of the Electronic Locks
battery state.
C. The Electronic Lock shall be wireless:
1. Data communication with the Server shall be wireless
2. Power shall come from an internal source
D. The access control software shall record door entry events.
1. An event shall be generated for the following:
a. Following a valid credential being read, when the door is unlocked.
b. Following an invalid credential being read, when the door is not unlocked.
c. When the door is forced.
d. When the door is left open.
e. When the battery level is low.
2. All events shall be time and date stamped.
3. All events shall contain which door they relate to.
4. All events from the Electronic Lock shall be communicated with the Server in real-time
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 5
E. The Electronic Lock shall remain functional while offline
1. The Electronic Lock shall make access control decisions without communication with the
Server.
2. The Electronic Lock shall store recent events while offline, updating the Server with the
events when communication is re-established.
F. The access control software shall monitor the battery life of Electronic Locks
1. It shall be possible to view an Electronic Locks remaining battery life in the ACS software.
a. Battery life shall be displayed as 5 states.
1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
A. Radio frequency
1. The Electronic Lock shall communicate with an Ethernet bridge.
a. The carrier frequency shall be 2.405 Ghz.
b. Each Ethernet bridge shall be able to communicate with a minimum of 10 Electronic
Locks.
c. The distance that an Electronic Lock can be located from an Ethernet bridge shall be
(in ‘open air’) at minimum 65' (20m).
2. The Electronic Lock shall communicate with a USB bridge.
a. The carrier frequency shall be 2.405 Ghz.
b. Each USB bridge shall be able to communicate with a minimum of 10 Electronic
Locks.
c. The distance that an Electronic Lock can be located from a USB bridge shall be (in
‘open air’) at minimum 100' (30m).
3. All wireless communication shall use AES 128bit encryption.
B. TCP/IP
1. The Ethernet Bridge shall communicate with the ACS Server
a. Communication shall be possible over the WAN/LAN using TCP/IP.
2. The USB Bridge shall communicate with the ACS Server over a WAN/LAN using TCP/IP.
a. Communication shall be possible over the WAN/LAN using TCP/IP.
C. The system shall utilise standard networking protocols to allow installation on corporate
infrastructure.
D. No manual addressing shall be required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturer: Paxton
1. Email address:
a. {US} [supportUS@paxton-access.com]
2. Telephone number:
a. {US} [877.438.7298]
3. Skype:
a. {UK} skype:Paxton.support
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C. The components of the Electronic Lock shall be available from a single source manufacturer
to assure compatibility of products.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 6
D. The manufacturer of the Electronic Lock shall also provide an Access Control System that is
compatible with the Electronic Lock.
E. The manufacturer of the Electronic Lock shall also provide a Door Entry System that is
compatible with the ACS.
F. Components shall consist of:
1. Access Control Software. The manufacturer shall have in its employ the software
engineering staff that write and manage the code for the ACS, and shall maintain all
licensing required.
2. Electronic Locks. The manufacturer of the Electronic Locks shall be the same as for the
Access Control System and the Access Control Software.
3. Wireless bridges. The manufacturer of the Electronic Locks shall also supply a selection
of wireless bridges to allow the wireless Electronic Locks to communicate with an ACS.
G. Substitution Limitations
1. It shall be possible to install an Electronic Lock into an existing Paxton ACS.
2. It shall be possible to install an Electronic Lock as a functional replacement of an existing
reader and door lock.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC LOCK
A. It shall be possible to incorporate the Electronic Lock into an existing ACS with the addition of
a wireless bridge.
B. The system shall comprise single-door Electronic Locks to ensure maximum system
resilience through fully distributed intelligence.
C. The Electronic Lock shall not include any switch settings to be adjusted.
D. The Electronic Lock shall come with no less than a five (5) year warranty.
E. It shall be possible to fit the Electronic Lock onto any door of 2" (51mm) thickness.
2.3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ELECTRONIC LOCK
A. Proximity Reader
1. The item shall contain a proximity reader. At a minimum, the following token technology
shall be supported:
a. Paxton HiTag2 125KHz
b. EM4100/02
2. The following formats of credential shall be supported:
a. Keyfob
b. Token
c. ISO card
d. Watchprox
3. The read range shall reach a maximum of 2.2" (55mm).
B. Display
1. The item shall house 2 LEDs
a. 1 x Red LED
b. 1 x Green LED
2. The LEDs shall indicate the following events:
a. Valid credential read – access granted
b. Invalid credential read – access denied
(i) Invalid permissions
(ii) Unknown credential
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 7
(iii) Barred credential
c. Update in progress
d. Binding to system
C. Audio
1. The item shall contain a sounder for audible feedback
2. A tone shall sound to indicate the following events:
a. Valid credential read – access granted
b. Invalid credential read – access denied
(i) Invalid permissions
(ii) Unknown credential
(iii) Barred credential
c. Update started
d. Binding to system
3. It shall be possible to disable audible feedback
D. User interaction
1. The item shall contain a proximity reader.
2. The item shall contain a key override.
3. The item shall include a handle on both sides.
a. The manufacturer shall provide an option of handle designs:
(i) Eclipse
(ii) Galaxy
b. The handle shall not rotate more than 70 degrees in a single direction.
c. The handle shall rotate at least 70 degrees for the latch to retract fully.
d. On the insecure side of the door:
(i) The handle shall be free to rotate when access is not permitted.
(ii) Upon presentation of a valid credential, rotating the handle shall unlock the door.
e. On the secure side of the door:
(i) Rotating the handle shall unlock the door, allowing exit at all times.
4. It shall be possible to configure the item to only read a presented credential when a
button is pressed
a. This shall be configured in the ACS software.
b. The button shall be located on the insecure side of the door.
c. When configured to work in this mode, the item shall not read passing tokens (in a
busy corridor for example).
E. Lock case
1. The Electronic Lock shall support a cylindrical lockset.
2. The manufacturer shall provide the item with a variety of lock cases:
a. C Keyway
b. SFIC
3. The lock case shall be compatible with a back set of 2.75" (70mm).
F. Power supply
1. The item shall be powered using 4 x AA Alkaline batteries
a. The batteries shall be located on the secure side of the door.
b. The batteries shall be accessible using a specialist tool provided by the ACS
manufacturer.
2. Battery life shall allow for a minimum of 20,000 operations before requiring replacement.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 8
a. Users shall always be able to exit, regardless of battery level or state.
b. Access using key override shall be possible when batteries require replacing.
3. The lock motor shall be powered by the ACU power supply.
4. 4 x AA Alkaline batteries shall be provided with the item at no extra cost.
G. Temperature
1. The item shall meet the required temperature standards for an internal product
a. The item shall operate reliably within the temperature range of +32°F to +131°F
(0°C to +55°C).
H. Housing
1. The item shall be stylish and modern.
2. The item shall have a similar look and feel on both sides of the door.
3. There shall be no visible fixings on the item.
I. Dimensions
1. The item shall contain the same footprint on both sides of the door.
2. The dimensions (for each side of the door) shall not exceed:
a. Excluding handle:
(i) A width of 3.8" (95mm) at its widest part
(ii) A height of 8.0" (205mm)
(iii) A depth of 1.3" (33mm)
b. Including handle:
(i) A width of 6.9" (175mm)
(ii) A height of 8.0" (205mm)
(iii) A depth of 3.0" (77mm)
J. Features
1. The item shall contain a low power mode:
a. While in the low power mode, the item shall have increased energy efficiency
2. The item shall store locally at minimum 10,000 credentials
3. The item shall communicate with the access control Server.
a. The item shall communicate all events in real-time.
b. The item shall communicate with the access control Server at least every hour.
(i) In low power mode, the item shall communicate with the access control Server at
least every 3 hours.
4. The item shall remain functional while offline
a. The item shall make access control decisions without communication with the Server.
b. The item shall store recent events while offline, updating the Server with the events
when communication is re-established.
(i) The item shall store at minimum 3,584 events while offline.
5. The item shall report its battery life to the Server.
a. It shall be possible to view an Electronic Locks remaining battery life in the ACS
software.
Battery life shall be displayed as 5 states to represent the remaining charge
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 9
2.4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR TOKENS
A. The manufacturer of the ACS shall be able to supply Paxton HiTag2 125KHz tokens.
1. The supplied tokens shall contain an authentication method to deter the copying and
unauthorised use of tokens.
2.5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR USB BRIDGE
A. Display
1. The item shall house 3 LEDs
a. 1 x Green LED
b. 1 x Red LED
c. 1 x Blue LED
2. The LEDs shall indicate the following:
a. If the item is powered
b. If the item is connected to USB / there is USB activity
c. Wireless activity / communication with the wireless Electronic Lock
B. Power supply
1. The item shall be powered from USB
a. The item shall draw a voltage of 5 V (± 0.25)
b. The item shall draw a maximum current of 150mA
C. Temperature
1. The item shall meet the required temperature standards for an internal product
a. The item shall operate reliably within the temperature range of +32°F to +131°F
(0°C to +55°C).
D. Housing
1. The item shall be provided with a mounting bracket at no extra cost.
2. The item shall feature an internal aerial.
E. Dimensions
1. The USB bridge shall contain the same footprint as the Ethernet bridge from the same
manufacturer.
2. The dimensions shall not exceed:
(i) A width of 2.7" (70mm)
(ii) A height of 7.7" (195mm)
(iii) A Length of 3.9" (100mm)
F. The ACS shall be limited to only one USB bridge
G. A USB bridge shall support at minimum 10 Electronic Locks
2.6 SPECIFIC REQUIRMENTS FOR ETHERNET BRIDGE
A. Display
1. The item shall house 3 LEDs
a. 1 x Green LED
b. 1 x Red LED
c. 1 x Blue LED
2. The LEDs shall indicate the following:
a. If the item is powered
b. If the item is connected to the LAN/WAN
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 10
c. Wireless activity / communication with the wireless Electronic Lock
B. Power supply
1. It shall be possible to power the item by Mains supply voltage:
a. A supply voltage as low as 100V AC shall be supported.
b. A supply voltage as high as 240V AC shall be supported.
2. It shall be possible to power the item via the Ethernet lead using PoE:
3. When powered:
a. The item shall draw a voltage of 12 V (± 2)
b. The item shall draw a maximum current of 150mA
C. Temperature
1. The item shall meet the required temperature standards for an internal product
a. The item shall operate reliably within the temperature range of +32°F to +131°F
(0°C to +55°C -).
D. Housing
1. The manufacturer shall provide the item with two housing variants:
a. White plastic PCB housing:
(i) The housing shall be wall mountable.
(ii) The housing shall contain room for a Power Supply.
b. Black/Grey desk housing:
(i) The housing shall be provided with a mounting bracket at no extra cost.
2. The item shall feature an internal aerial.
E. Dimensions
1. The dimensions shall not exceed:
a. For White plastic PCB housing:
(i) A width of 7.9" (200mm)
(ii) A height of 3.1" (80mm)
(iii) A Length of 7.9" (200mm)
b. For Black/Grey desk housing:
(i) A width of 2.7" (70mm)
(ii) A height of 7.7" (195mm)
(iii) A Length of 3.9" (100mm)
F. The ACS shall support at minimum 200 Ethernet bridges
G. An Ethernet bridge shall support at minimum 10 Electronic Locks
2.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE
A. It shall be possible to configure the following Electronic Lock settings from the ACS software:
1. Door name
2. Reader name
3. Door open time
4. Time period to keep the door unlocked during
5. Lock operation
a. Configure to unlock each time a credential is presented
b. Configure to toggle the lock locked/unlocked
6. Enable/Disable alarm for door forced
7. Enable/Disable alarm for door left open
8. Enable/Disable sound
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA+LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE
281000 - 11
9. Enable/Disable low power mode
B. Changes in the configuration software shall take affect when the Electronic Lock next
communicates with the ACS.
2.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Perform a final inspection of the installed door hardware and access control
system and state in report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,
including whether each component representing the opening assembly is properly installed,
adjusted, operating and performing to system operational narratives.
B. Commissioning and Testing Schedule: Reference Division 28 Section "Access Control
System."
2.9 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.0 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.1 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They
are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies,
conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with
corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set
should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and
functionality.
END OF SECTION
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282300 - 1
SECTION 282300
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. CCTV - Closed Circuit Television System.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 00 (16050) - Common Work Results for Electrical
2. Section 26 05 53 (16075) - Identification for Electrical Systems
3. Section 26 35 33 (16280) - Power Factor Correction Equipment
4. Section 27 05 00 (16050) - Common Work Results for Communications
5. Section 28 16 00 (13730) – Intrusion Detection
6. Section 28 31 00 (13850) - Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Publications:
1. C2 “ASC C2 Eighth Interim Collection of the National Electrical Safety Code”
2. C62.41 “Surge Voltages In Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits”
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
2. 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”
C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards:
1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper
Conductors”
2. 486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use With Aluminum Conductors”
3. 1449 “Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors”
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. CCTV: Closed Circuit IP based Surveillance system.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Video cameras, camera outlets, camera controls, monitors, PoE switches, signal processing
equipment, control stations, distribution components, a network video recorders, and
accessories to generate video images, process them, and distribute them.
B. System shall display images on monitors and provide for remote control of video-camera
equipment.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed manufacturer's specifications for each component specified.
Include data on features, ratings, and performance.
B. Shop Drawings: For CCTV equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Network Diagram showing wiring and cable distances. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of CCTV equipment and components certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SECTION
282300 - 2
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements of installed systems.
F. Maintenance Data: For CCTV equipment and components to include in maintenance manuals
refer to Section 01 78 23 - “Operating and Maintenance Data” and Section 01 77 00 -
"Closeout Procedures”. In addition to those requirements, include the following:
1. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
2. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
3. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at the site
for ready access.
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the
CCTV equipment manufacturer, for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project, to supervise installation of the system.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of CCTV
equipment and are based on the specific system indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with 47 CFR 15, 17, and 76.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: System components are equipped and rated for the environments
where installed.
1. Service Conditions for Indoor Equipment: Rate equipment for continuous operation under
the following environmental conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Temperature: 32 deg F to 106 deg F.
b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 90 percent (non-condensing).
1.08 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate work of this section with requirements of surveillance equipment provider.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of surveillance equipment and suspension system
components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with warranties made by Contractor under the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flir Digimerge is the Preferred Manufacturer:
FLIR Systems, Inc, 27700 SW Parkway Ave, Wilsonville, OR 97070, USA
866.344.4674
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions accepted of similar or more robust solution manufacturers
2.02 CCTV COMPONENTS
A. Dome Camera: 3.1 MP, True Day/Night; 3mm wide angle; UNI; UTP.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282300 - 3
1. Fixed Cameras: Digital color HD IP based, - Capable of producing usable video images
when used with 3.9 mm wide-angle Acceptable Products:
a. "Model N133EDP 2.1 Megapixel, color high definition"; Flir Digimerge
2. Features:
a. 3.1 MP HD ½.7” CMOS or Higher Resolution
b. 3.6mm Wide Angle lens - 90˚ (H) field of view
c. Composite & UTP Video Outputs
d. 70 foot/21 meters IR Night Vision / TDN
e. 1080 P @25/30 frames per second
f. FLIR Cloud Mobile Apps, Iphone, IPad, Android
g. HD picture quality at real time
h. Digital Noise Reduction Function
i. Dual-streaming (H.264/MJPEG
j. 3-Axis design for Wall/Ceiling mounting
k. Video Motion Detection (VMD)
l. Remote Network viewing
m. 12V/PoE (802.3af)
n. 3-year warranty
o. -22ºF/-30º C Cold Weather Capable
p. Interior Vandal or Exterior Vandal Housing
q. Multisite viewing on FLIR Cloud CMS for PC Housing with Built-in Heater
2. 64 Channel FLIR Cloud CMS included
3. 2D-DNR / D-WDR
4. Onvif Profile S conformance
5. True Day/Night IR Cut Filter plus IR Illumination
6. View live or recorded video remotely
7. E-Mail Notification: 1/60 to 1/100,000 second
8. Iris Control: Electronic/passive
9. Gain Control: Selectable by DIP switch (0-20 dB)
10. Minimum Illumination: <1.2 lux at 30 IRE, f1.2
11. Video Output: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms
12. Signal-to Noise Ratio: 48 dB (AGC off)
13. Synchronize System: Internal or line lock
14. Vertical Phase: Adjustable, 0° ±120°
15. Backlight Compensation: Automatic: Adjusts AGC and AES
16. Signal Processing: Digital Signal Processing
17. Camera-Supporting Equipment: Rated for load in excess of the total weight supported
times a minimum safety factor of two
a. Power: Is PoE 12V/PoE (802.3af)
b. "Model N133EDP
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SECTION
282300 - 4
B. Monitors: Color, metal cabinet units designed for continuous operation. 1517-inch active TFT
LCD color, multimode monitor with minimum 50 pound rated rack mount as required.
1. Acceptable Product:
a. Monitor: “Part Number M170CP2PMCL315 Color LCD Monitor”;
b. Wall Mount: “Part Number A-CS777PMCL WM VESA”;
2. Quantity: 1
3. Screen Size (Diagonal Dimension): 1517”
4. LCD Panel Pixel Array: 1280 X 1024,1024 X 768, 75HZ.
5. Minimum Front Panel Devices and Controls: Power switch, power-on indicator, and
brightness.
C. NVR: Professional Network Video Recorder, 16 Ch or 2/8-Channel, H.246 120/120/120, VGA,
No Audio, 2-USB (1-mouse only), Looping, Mouse, IR, 4 Terabytes MPEG-4 compression.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. "Model DNR408P2;
1) Quantity: 2 each with 8 PoE.
b. "Model LB1000";
1) Quantity: 1 each.
2. Features:
a. Video:
1) Signal Format: NTSC or PAL (auto detect).
2) Video Input: Composite: 1.
3) Monitor Outputs: Composite: One (BNC), 1 Vp-p, 75 Ohms / Analog RGB: One
VGA.
4) Display Resolution: 720x480 (NTSC)
5) Record Resolution: 720P (1280 X 720) 1080P (1920 X1080) 3MP (2028 X
1536) 5MP (2560 X 1920).
6) Playback/Record Speed: 120-ips (standard resolution) / 60-ips (high
resolution) / 30-ips (very high resolution).
7) Codec: H.264
b. Inputs / Outputs:
1) Alarm Input: 4 TTL, NC/NO programmable, 4.3V threshold
2) Alarm Output: 2 relay out, terminal block, NC&NO, / 0.5A @ 125VAC, 1A @
30VDC
3) Alarm Reset Input: 1 TTL, terminal block
4) Internal Buzzer: 80db at 10cm
5) Network Connectivity: 10/100 Base Ethernet
2. Resolution: Up to 704 X 480 (NTSC)
3. Images Per Second: Up to 120 IPS at 352 X 240 resolution
4. Settings: Independent Channel Resolution, Quality, and Frame
settings.
5. Functions: Full function Remote Agent with Administration
Functions.
6. Internal Storage: Up to 4 TB
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282300 - 5
7. PTZ control: Local or remote PTZ control via Pelco D and Pelco P
protocols.
8. Remote Control: Standard Accessory
9. Inputs/Outputs: 1 - Audio inputs
1 - Audio output
4 - Alarm inputs
1 - relay output
10. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 45dB for video output in the standard play mode
11. Additional Features: Support for Continuous, motion, alarm, and
scheduled recording for maximum utilization of hard
disk drives.
12. Mounting: Standard 19-inch electronic equipment cabinet or
free standing desktop.
2.03 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS
A. Cable: CAT 6 UTP cable elements have 75-ohms nominal impedance and are 100 percent
factory-sweep tested to meet or exceed requirements of NFPA 70, Articles 725, 800, and 820.
Cables run in environmental air spaces are listed for use in plenums.
1. CCTV Video Distribution: RG-59/U; cellular-polyethylene dielectric, bare-copper braid
shield with 95 percent minimum shielding factor, No. 22 AWG stranded copper
conductor; and PVC jacket.
B. CCTV Coaxial Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Install all cable, and complete cable and power connections to all system devices.
C. Wire all system components in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA and any
other authority having jurisdiction.
D. All equipment shall be firmly secured in place with all supports and fastenings providing a
safety factor of at least three. Provide adequate ventilation for all equipment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Outdoor Installation: Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
B. Install surge suppressors where ac-power-operated devices are not protected against voltage
transients by integral surge suppressors specified in UL 1449. Install surge suppressors at
the devices' power-line terminals. Comply with Section 26 35 33 - “Power Factor Correction
Equipment”.
C. Wiring Method: Install CAT 6 enhanced cables on J-hooks.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing
bars and distribution spools.
E. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not install
bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation
and replace it with new cable.
F. Equalizing Video Signals: Where system performance may be degraded in certain operating
modes, revise component connections and install video distribution amplifiers and attenuates
as required to provide a balanced signal across the system.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SECTION
282300 - 6
G. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips
in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten
electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
H. Grounding: Provide independent signal circuit grounding recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install cameras at final locations defined by camera location tests. Install cameras with 84-
inch minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change type of mounting to
achieve required clearance.
B. Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of
view required for camera.
C. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations. Do not install such
items near the devices they serve, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Placement:
1. CCTV Camera Placement: Mount camera to the ceiling tile in the corner behind the Front
Desk that is opposite the main entrance. The purpose of the camera is to identify armed
assailants standing in front of the desk. (Note: All attempts should be made to also
position the camera to view persons standing near the intercom in the lobby vestibule.
2. Mount and Monitor Placement:
a. Monitor mount provided shall be installed directly under the CCTV Camera fixed with
appropriate fasteners to support a minimum 14” color flat screen monitor. (Note: All
attempts should be made to make the monitor conspicuously visible from the front
entrance and cable/wire system correctly to always display time date stamp from the
NVR .
b. CCTV # 2 Camera Placement: Mount camera within the “computer room” (room
where the computer/MicrosF.O.S.S.E. server is located that contains credit card
information). The camera must identify persons accessing the MicrosF.O.S.S.E.
server. If the camera is not able to properly fit in the room to identify persons, then
place the camera on the exterior of the room to identify persons who are exiting the
room.
c. CCTV # 3 Camera Placement: Mount camera within the work room to identify
persons who opens the drop safe within the room.
3. NVR Placement: The NVR shall be housed in the MDF provided and powered from the
AC outlet inside the lock box. The DVR, lock box, and monitor shall be placed in the
telephone equipment room directly behind the front desk. If the telephone equipment
room is not within close proximity to the front desk then the DVR, lock box, and monitor
shall be placed in a secured office behind the front desk. The keys shall be surrendered
to the General Manager and secured according to Owner procedures.
E. DVR Programming: Set the current time and date and position display so as to not interfere
with the camera field of view. The DVR should be programmed to record minimum 14 days,
high resolution with minimum 4 frames per second per camera. .
F. Camera Adjustments: The camera provided shall be factory set and white balanced. A
manual iris, variable focus lens shall be provided. The lens should be adjusted so as to
capture as much of the desk area as possible while maintaining the ability to identify a person
at the counter. Adjust the iris to achieve optimal lighting with consideration given to the main
entrance diffusing sunlight toward the camera.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Section 26 05 53 -
"Identification for Electrical Systems”.
155 PLEASANT STREET PFRA + LDa
Northampton, MA June 3, 2016
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
282300 - 7
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform field quality control testing.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pre-testing, testing,
and adjusting of CCTV equipment.
C. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and
that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
D. Pre-testing: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify
that they comply with specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items.
Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare CCTV equipment
for acceptance and operational testing as follows:
1. CCTV Sources: Connect the receiver to the output of each CCTV signal source or the
distribution amplifier associated with it.
E. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pre-testing has successfully been completed and system
has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days
notice of test schedule to Owner's Representative.
F. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in
all functional modes.
G. CCTV Camera Location Test: Temporarily support each camera at the indicated location and
connect to monitor. Adjust camera location and mounting and substitute fixed lenses to
provide required performance at monitor. Adjust locations within 15 feet of those indicated.
H. Record test results.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
B. Clean CCTV system components, camera housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain CCTV equipment.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for troubleshooting,
servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of components
and settings for system controls.
3. Demonstrate programming and tuning of satellite receivers.
4. Conduct training as specified in Section 01 79 00 - "Demonstration and Training”.
3.08 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by Owner within one year of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in tuning and adjusting the system to suit actual
occupied conditions and to optimize performance. Provide up to two adjustments at Project
site for this purpose, without additional cost.
END OF SECTION
E
8
U
6
TEL/DATA
120
ALL GENDER REST. RM
121
9'-0"7'-0"120
121
11'-8 3/4"7'-0"2
6
2
2
55
1
5
Date:
Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"
06/16/16
LEVEL 1 TEL/DATA ROOM SKA-01LIVE 155
155 PLEASANT ST.
NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 LEVEL 1 - TEL/DATA
C
L1
L1
4'-6"CL
CL
L1
L1
L1
L1
EQEQCL
Q Q
C
EL:
C1
9' - 0 3/4"AFF
EQEQ5'-3 1/2"5'-7 1/2"5'-7 1/2"5'-7 1/2"EQEQEQEQEQ EQ
C
EL:
C1
10' - 0"AFF C
EL:
C2
12' - 4 7/8"AFF
EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ
1'-6"2'-6"RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY ABOVE
(LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE SUSPENDED)
L1
Date:
Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0"
06/16/16
LEVEL 1 TEL/DATA RCP SKA-01ALIVE 155
155 PLEASANT ST.
NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 LEVEL 1 TEL/DATA RCP
Date:
Scale:
06/16/16
TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULESKA-02LIVE 155
155 PLEASANT ST.
NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060
1
15
F
G
A201
2
E
A202
4
9
I
8
10
2
2
14
M
T
H
L
B
A202
1
A
C
7
A201
4
A200
1
U
A202
3
A201
3
A200
3
A200
2
A200
5
A202
5
A200
4
4
J
K
A201
1
11
13
12
12
D
36
2
A300
15
N
S
R
Q
P
18
18
17
17
16
16
19
19
20
O
21
22
1
A300
4
A301
3
A301
ELEVATOR HEADHOUSE
RD/ORD
1
A301
2
A301
3
A300
4
A300H.P.H.P.H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.TYP.4'-0"21.1
4
A373
H.P.
PREFINISHED ALUMINUM COPING & EXPANSION JOINT 10'-0" OC, TYP.
TYP.
10'-0"
1
A373
3
A373
ACHP-1
RTU-1
EF-1
ERV-3
2
A373
RD/ORD
H.P.
RD/ORD
RD/ORD
RD/ORD
9.1
C.1
PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS & REFRIGERANT PIPING ENTRY POINT, TYP.61'-0"2'-3 1/4"
105'-10 1/4"7'-1"54'-4"
1'-11 1/4"6'-2 1/8"2'-1 3/16"
15'-11 5/16"19'-2 15/16"38'-9 3/4"85'-8 3/4"62'-9 3/4"35'-6 3/4"7'-5 1/4"5'-3 1/2"22'-5 1/4"5'-9 1/2"110'-6 3/4"
ALIGN CENTER LINE OF TRACK POST TO GRIDLINE
FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM TIE-OFF, TYPICAL.
PTD STL CONDENSER RACK, SEE A104 FOR ADDITIONAL ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT
TYP.4'-0"TYP.3'-0"FLEXIBLE WALKWAY
ROOF HATCH
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.H.P.
H.P.H.P.
CANOPY BELOW
CRICKET, TYP.H.P.H.P.H.P.H.P.CRICKET, TYP.
PRE-FINISHED ALUMINUM CORNICE
CANOPY BELOW
ROOFTOP UNITS PER MECHANICAL
SLOPE TO
DRAIN 1/4" PER
1'-0", TYP.
SLOPE TO
DRAIN 1/4" PER
1'-0", TYP.
ROOF DRAIN/OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN & SUMP PER PLUMBING, TYP. OF 5 LOCATIONS
H.P.
22'-5"8'-6"8'-6"8'-6"34'-6"ROOF VENT PER PLUMBING
VENT PER PLUMBING
ROOF VENT PER PLUMBING
CRICKET, TYP.
ROOF CURB
42" GUARDRAIL
CL7'-9"4'-10 7/8"CL12.5°5
A373
REVISION:
SHEET INFO:
ISSUANCE:
DATE:
SCALE:
DRAWN:
CHECKED:
Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect
181 Main Street, Suite One
Northampton, MA 01060
413 585-5910
www.pfra.us
LDa Architecture & Interiors
222 Third Street, Suite 3212
Cambridge, MA 02142
617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477
www.LDa-Architects.com
1/8" = 1'-0"6/16/2016 1:54:24 PM6 - 15 - 16
TA
PM/DD
ROOF PLAN 155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060LIVE 155100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS -
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
A103201420SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 ROOF PLAN
ADDENDUM #2
REVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:NONEBSMRRGENERAL NOTES155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
LIVE 155
S0.01201420LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.comOffice of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
NOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.WB-1 ETC INDICATES BRACING ELEVATION.SEE S2.01 FOR ELEVATION & DETAILS.4.CP1 ETC INDICATES CIP PIER. SEE DETAILSON S0.02 & S3.01 FOR SIZE & REINFORCEMENT.5."F1" ETC INDICATES FOOTING TYPE SEE THISDRAWING FOR SCHEDULE.6."SF" INDICATES STEPPED FOOTING SEE DETAIL11 ON S0.02.7.ELEVATION 0'-0" EQUALS ELEVATION 124'-678".MARKTYPEREINFFOOTING SCHEDULE2 TSF (ALLOWABLE BEAM CAPACITY)F66'-0"x6'-0"x1'-4"8-#5 BEWF55'-0"x5'-0"x1'-3"5-#5 BEWF4.54'-6"x4'-6"x1'-0"5-#5 BEWF77'-0"x7'-0"x1'-8"7-#6 BEWF8A8'-0"x8'-0"x2'-0"9-#6 T&B EWF8x108'-0"x10'-0"x2'-0"-F6A6'-0"x6'-0"x2'-0"8-#5 T&B EWF88'-0"x8'-0"x2'-0"9-#6 BEW9820145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPN1912JTU2233K2221OSW SWSWSWSWSW
WB-1
WB-2
WB-3
WB-4 5" SLAB ON GRADEREINFORCE w/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWFTOC EL 0'-0"F4.5A(-2'-3")F4.5(-4'-6")F6(-5'-0")F6(-2'-4")F8A(-3'-0")F5(-4'-9")F4.5A(-3'-0")F8(-3'-0")F6A(-10'-4")CP1F6(-6'-4")F6A(-8'-0")F5(-4'-9")F6(-4'-10")F6A(-10'-4")5" SLAB ON GRADEREINFORCE w/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWFTOC EL 0'-0"F8(-4'-9")F8A(-3'-0")F8A(-5'-6")CP1F7(-5'-3")F6(-4'-10")F8(-3'-0")F8(-3'-0")F6A(-8'-4")F6A(-5'-6")F8(-5'-0")CP1F8(-5'-0")2S3.011S3.011'-3" THICK SLABw/ #6@9" T&B EWTOC EL -5'-0"F6(-4'-10")F6(-4'-10")4S3.01F5(-4'-9")F6A(-5'-6")F6A(-5'-6")F4.5(-4'-6")CP1F4.5A(-4'-9")SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW
SW SWSW
HSS 4.0 x .25POST UP (AESS)w/ 58"x12"x12"BASE PLATE +4-34$1&+25BOLTS2'-6"x2'-6"x1'-0"FOOTINGw/ 16"x16" CIPPIER2'-6"x2'-6"x1'-0"FOOTINGw/ 16"x16" CIPPIERF4.5A4'-6"x4'-6"x1'-3"5-#5 BEWF4.5A(-2'-3")C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AF4.5A(-2'-3")C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC4 UPBASE PLATETYPE AAF8(-5'-0")P2 UPP2 UPC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE AAC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE BC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE A28S3.018S3.01(-4'-6")13S3.0111S3.01(-4'-6")CP2(-4'-6")(-4'-6")(-4'-6")CP1F4.5A(-6'-3")SWCP4CP4CP4CP4CP4CP4CP2C3 UPBASE PLATETYPE C1CP1F8(-5'-0")SWSWC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABF8(-3'-0")3S3.01C3 UPBASE PLATETYPE A1C3 UPBASE PLATETYPE D1C2 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE BC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE D1C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE B1C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C3 UPBASE PLATETYPE B1C2 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE A1MARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x12C8HSS 5x10x38CP1F4.5A(-6'-3")C7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE A1C7 UPBASE PLATETYPE A2C7 UPBASE PLATETYPE A2C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE D13S3.01F5(-4'-9")F5(-4'-9")CPXF5(-4'-9")C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE DF5(-4'-9")(-4'-6")
SF(-4'-6")SF
(-9'-4")(-7'-4")SWSWSW
SW
SW
SWSWSWSW
C1 UP(-4'-6")(-4'-6")1'-9"25'-914"5'-0"21'-6"6'-0"4'-312"
8'-612"26'-1018"
22'-4"18'-234"18'-314"22'-4"22'-3"18'-014"22'-014"22'-0"18'-034"22'-4"8'-0"19'-6"5'-0"21'-2"6'-4"11'-1158"22'-1516"10'-4516"18'-234"5'-0"
22'-6"
5'-0"
514"9'-514"7'-3"7'-312"1ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCP5 UPP2 UPP5 UPP2 UPP5 UPP5 UPP2 UPW113S3.01(-4'-6")W1W1
W1
W1
W1 MULTIPLE PIPESTHRU FOUNDATIONWALL ALONGCOLUMNS P & Q,COORDINATEw/ PLUMBING /MECH DRAWINGS3'-0" TYPW1W1W1
W1
W1 9S3.01(-4'-6")(-4'-6")PENETRATION IN WALLFOR ELECTRICAL CONDUITS.SEE DETAIL 12 ON S0.02 FORREINFORCEMENT. COORDINATEw/ ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.CP3(-4'-6")
(-7'-0")
SF
W1
3S3.01W1
CP29S3.01(-4'-6")(-7'-0")
SF
10S3.01CP2CP1CP1GB (24x24)6" PIPE, SEEPLUMBINGDWGS(-9'-4")
4'-338"7S3.01(-7'-4")12S3.01C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE D(-9'-4")12S3.014S3.01SF(-9'-4")WALL NOTES:1.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2), SEE ARCH DRAWINGS.2.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE112x512 VERSA-STUDS @16" OC w/ 12" PLYWOODSHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD IS NAILED TOSTUDS w/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACEDAT 4" OC AT PANEL EDGES AND 12" OC ATINTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL EXTERIOR WALLSARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.AT BRICK BACKUP 112x512 VERSA-STUDS ARE TO BESPACED @12" OC.3.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISENOTED w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHINGON ONE SIDE, SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TOSTUDS w/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED@4" OC AT PANEL EDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATESUPPORTS. ALL SHEAR WALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANELJOINTS.SWW2P6 UPP6 UPP6 UPC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE DC2BASE PLATETYPE DC2BASE PLATETYPE DC2BASE PLATETYPE D16S0.02CP16" PIPE, SEEPLUMBINGDWGSREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRFOUNDATION / FIRST FLOOR PLANS1.01LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
NOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.TOP OF STEEL EL X'-X".4.WB-1 ETC INDICATES BRACING ELEVATION.SEE S2.01 FOR ELEVATION & DETAILS.5.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" T&G PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.6.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" 'FRT' PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.7. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'MST37' STRAP TIE.6. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'LTT131' TENSION TIES T&B w/ 587+5($'('52'.98203-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x6SW
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x6SW SWSW5S3.026S3.028S3.0212S3.02145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPN16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC193-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x6SWSW12JTU3-2x82233KSW 22213-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OCO514x912LVL3-2x8 2x10@16" OC2x10@16" OCSWSW SWSW
SW
SW
P5 UPP5 UPSW
SWSWSWSW
SW
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
16 BCI 6000'S
@24" OC
@16" OC2x1016" BCI 90'S16" BCI 60'S@24" OC@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
912 BCI 6500'S @16" OC WB-116" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC@24" OC16" BCI 90'S@24" OCWB-2
WB-4
W27x94
W18x50W16x40W30x90 W16x26W14x30
W27x84W24x68W18x46
W16x40
W24x62W24x68W14x30
W18x46 W14x26
W14x26
W16x26
W14x22W21x44W21x50
W30x90W24x68W18x46
W21x50
SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW SWSW
W24x84
W24x55W14x30
W24x55
W14x30 W14x30W14x30
W14x30W14x30W24x62SWW14x30W24x62W14x30
W24x62
W14x30
W24x62 W14x30W14x30W14x30
W24x62W24x62
W14x30
W24x55
W24x55W14x30W14x30
W14x30 W14x30 W24x55HSS 4.0 x .25POST DN (AESS)HSS 4.0 x .25POST DN (AESS)W8x24
2-2x12 'FRT'2x12@16" OC 'FRT'3-2x12 'FRT'2-2x12 'FRT' LEDGERLAGGED TO STUDS3-2x12 'FRT'2-2x12
'FRT'2x12@12" OC 'FRT'2x12@16" OCP5 UPW24x84W8x
1
82-2x10 LEDGERLAGGED TO STUDSHSS 1.9 x 0.188 AESSHANGER TYPICAL3 PLACES3-2
x
1
0
W16x26W16x26W16x26W16x26
P2 UPC1 DNP2 UPC1 DNC3 DNC3 DNC3 DNC7 DNC4 DNW16x31W10x22
W16x26 6S3.026S3.023-2x62x10@16" OCP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DN10S3.02C5 UPC7 DN9S3.02C5 UPC7 DNW10x22C1 DN8S3.02C1 DNW10x2212S3.02312x117 8 LVL312x1178 LVL312x1178 LVLC1 DNC1 DNW21x50
W10x30
C7 DNC7 DNC7 DNW16x26
W14x26
17S3.02W16x26
W16x36
W14x34
W14x2215S3.02W14x22W14x22W14x30W14x22
W14x22W14x22W14x22C3 DNC7 DNC7 DNC8 DNC8 DNC8 DNC8 DNC8 DNC8 DNC3 DNMARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x12C8HSS 5x10x38C2 DNC2 DNC1 DNC2 DNW14x22C2 DNC3 DNC3 DNC2 DNC3 DNC3 DNC7 DNC7 DNC1 DNC1 DNC2 DNW14x34
W16x31
2x10@16" OC'FRT'C1 DNW8x24
SW
SW
W8x18
W8x18 (
L
O
W
)
W8x18
(LOW)0"15 (SIM)S3.02'FRT'2x12@16" OC'FRT'2-2x12
'FRT'2-2x10W14x22SW312x16 LVL 3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x8SWSWSWSWSW
@24" OC
SWSW1ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCW1
W23-2x83-2x8W2BLOCK SOLIDBETWEEN WBEAMSW23-2x8W2
W1
W2P5 UP& DNP2 UP& DNW1
W1
17S3.02W1
W1
W1 W1
W1
W1
W1 W1W1
W2
P5 UPP5 UP& DNP2 UP& DN514x714 LVL
W2W2WALL NOTES:1.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) BEARING WALL STARTS ON SLAB OR BEAM.2.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) SEE ARCHDRAWINGS.3.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD ISNAILED TO STUDS w/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILSSPACED AT 4" OC AT PANEL EDGES AND 12" OC ATINTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL EXTERIOR WALLS AREBLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS. AT BRICK BACKUP 2x6 STUDSARE TO BE SPACED @12" OC.4. INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE,SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDS w/ 10dGALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED @4" OC AT PANELEDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL SHEARWALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.6.AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVED STRAP TIE INDICATED INNOTE 7 @ EXTERIOR SITE OF WALL. AT SHEAR WALLS,PROVIDE TENSION TIES INDICATED IN NOTE 8 @ INTERIORSIDE OF WALL.SW3S3.03P6 UPP6 UPP6 UPP5 DNP5 DN514x912 LVL514x912 LVL514x912 LVLW24x62514x714 LVLP2 DN1S3.03W24x55
W14x30W217S3.02FULLY BLOCKBETWEEN BCI JOIST19S3.0210'-0"W14x303-2x63-2x618S3.0219S3.02WB-3 FULLY BLOCKBETWEEN BCIJOIST514x16 LVL 514x16 LVL
19S3.02W24x62P6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UPP6 UP& DNAS1.02AS1.02A (SIM)S1.02AS1.02514x1178LVL312x1178LVL2x10
@16" OC
312x1178 LVL514x1178 LVL2x10
@16" OC
2x10
@16" OCSEE DETAIL20 ON S3.02W2W2SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A1'-37 8" SEE ARCH DWGSPLAN VIEW2x STUD WALL514x7 LVL POST(P6)BRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSL6x8x716 LLH (CUTHORIZ LEG ASREQUIRED) OR 38"THK BENT PLHSS 5x5x38POSTHSS 5x10x38 BEAM4S3.035S3.03L6x8x716 LLH (CUT HORIZLEG AS REQUIRED) OR38" THK BENT PLMITRE JOINTPROVIDE FULLPENETRATIONWELD614" SEEARCH DWGSL4x4x716NOTE:ALL STEEL TO BE HOTDIPPED GALVREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRSECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLANS1.02LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
CONTRACTOR-COORDINATELOCATION OF JOISTS & TRUSSESw/RECESSED LIGHTINGLOCATIONS & ALL PLUMBING /MECHANICAL - SEE ARCHDRAWINGS982016" BCI 90'S @24" OC 2x10@16" oc3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x6
3-2x6 3-2x6
3-2x6
3-2x83-2x8 3-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x6SW
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x6BRICK VENEERw/ CONT L6x8x716(LLH) GALVRELIEVING ANGLEw/ 2-58" LAGS @12"OC INTO STUDS &HEADERS. SEEDETAIL 16 ON S3.02FOR ADD'L NOTES.SWSW3-2x6
3-2x6
SW SWSWSW
SWSW
SW
SW5S3.026S3.028S3.0212S3.0212S3.02145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPN16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC193-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x616" BCI 60'S@24" OC3-2x6SWSW1216" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x8J3-2x8TU3-2x6 3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x816 BCI 6000'S
@24" OC
3-2x10
2233K@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
514x16 LVL@16" o
c 514x16 LVLFLITCHBEAM #1514x14 LVL3-2x6
P5 UP& DNP5 UP& DNSW
SWSWSWSW
SW 22213-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x6514x1178LVL312x1178LVL 2x10@16" OCO3-2x83-2x8 2x10@16" OC2x10@16" OC3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x10SW3-2x6
SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW SWSW
P5 UP& DNHSS 1.9 x 0.188 AESSHANGER TYPICAL3 PLACES3-2
x
1
0 6S3.026S3.023-2x63-2x10
P2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DN10S3.02C5 UP& DN9S3.0211S3.02C5 UP& DN16S3.0216S3.0216S3.028S3.022x10
@16" OC12S3.0212S3.02312x1178 LVL
312x1178 LVL312x1178 LVL312x1178 LVLMARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x12C8HSS 5x10x38SW
SW 2x10@16" OC2-2x10SW3-2x63-2x62x10
@16" O
C
312x16 LVL
312x16 LVL
3-2x68S3.023-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x81ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCW1
W1
W2W2W2P2 UPP5 DNP2 UP& DNW1
W1
W1
W1
W1 W1
W1
W1
W1 W1W1
W2
W2
W2
P5 UP& DNP5 UP& DNP2 UP& DNW2W23-2x8 514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL3-2x8514x712 LVL514x712 LVLNOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.INDICATES FLUSH FRAMED CONDITIONREQUIRING JOIST HANGER SEE SCHEDULE ON S0.01.4.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" T&G PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.5. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'MST37' STRAP TIE.6. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'LTT131' TENSION TIES T&B w/ 587+5($'('52'7.FLITCH BEAM #1 - 3-134x14 LVL'S + 2-516"x1312" PLATES.SEE DETAIL 14 ON S3.02.WALL NOTES:1.INDICATES BEARING WALL BELOW.2.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) BEARING WALL STARTS ON SLAB OR BEAM.3.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) SEE ARCHDRAWINGS.4.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOODSHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDSw/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED AT 4" OC ATPANEL EDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.AT BRICK BACKUP 2x6 STUDS ARE TO BE SPACED @12" OC.5. INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE,SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDS w/ 10dGALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED @4" OC AT PANELEDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL SHEARWALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.6.AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVED STRAP TIE INDICATED INNOTE 5 @ EXTERIOR SITE OF WALL. AT SHEAR WALLS,PROVIDE TENSION TIES INDICATED IN NOTE 6 @ INTERIORSIDE OF WALL.SW2S3.03P6 DNP6 DNP6 DNAS1.03AS1.03AS1.03AS1.03W2SWP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DN312x1178 LVL514x1178 LVL2x10
@16" OC
2x10
@16" OCSEE DETAIL20 ON S3.02W2W2SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A1'-37 8" SEE ARCH DWGSPLAN VIEW2x STUD WALL514x7 LVL POST(P6)BRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSL6x8x716 LLH (CUTHORIZ LEG ASREQUIRED) OR 38"THK BENT PLHSS 5x5x38POSTHSS 5x10x38 BEAM4S3.035S3.03L6x8x716 LLH (CUT HORIZLEG AS REQUIRED) OR38" THK BENT PLMITRE JOINTPROVIDE FULLPENETRATIONWELD614" SEE
ARCH DWGS
L4x4x716NOTE:ALL STEEL TO BE HOTDIPPED GALVREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRTHIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLANS1.03LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
CONTRACTOR-COORDINATELOCATION OF JOISTS & TRUSSESw/RECESSED LIGHTINGLOCATIONS & ALL PLUMBING /MECHANICAL - SEE ARCHDRAWINGS982016" BCI 90'S @24" OC 2x10@16" oc3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x6
3-2x6 3-2x6
3-2x6
3-2x83-2x8 3-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x6SW
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x6BRICK VENEERw/ CONT L6x8x716(LLH)GALVRELIEVING ANGLEw/ 2-58" LAGS @12"OC INTO STUDS &HEADERS. SEEDETAIL 16 ON S3.02FOR ADD'L NOTES.SWSW3-2x6
3-2x6
SW SWSWSW
SWSW
SW
SW5S3.026S3.028S3.0212 (SIM)S3.0212S3.02145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPN16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC193-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 60'S@24" OC3-2x62x10@16" OCSWSW1216" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x8J3-2x8TU3-2x6 3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x816 BCI 6000'S
@24" OC
3-2x10
2233K@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
514x16 LVL@16" o
c 514x16 LVLFLITCHBEAM #1514x14 LVL3-2x8
P5 UP& DNP5 UP& DNSW
SWSWSWSW
SW 22213-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x6
2x10@16" OC
314x1178 LVLO3-2x83-2x8 2x10@16" OC3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x10SW3-2x6 3-2x6SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW SWSW
P5 UP& DN3-2
x
1
0 6S3.026S3.023-2x63-2x10
P2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DN10S3.02P5 UPC5 DN9S3.0211S3.02P5 UPC5 DN16S3.0216S3.0216S3.028S3.02314x1178 LVL314x1178 LVL314x1178 LVLMARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x12C8HSS 5x10x38SW
SW 2x10@16" OC2-2x10SW3-2x63-2x62x10
@16" O
C
312x16 LVL
312x16 LVL
3-2x68S3.023-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x8W1
W1
W2W2W2P2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNW1
W1
W1
W1
W1 W1
W1
W1
W1 W1W1
W2
W2
W2
P5 UP& DNP5 DNP2 DNW2W23-2x8 514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL3-2x8514x712 LVL514x712 LVLNOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.INDICATES FLUSH FRAMED CONDITIONREQUIRING JOIST HANGER SEE SCHEDULE ON S0.01.4.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" T&G PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.5. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'MST37' STRAP TIE.6. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'LTT131' TENSION TIES T&B w/ 587+5($'('52'7.FLITCH BEAM #1 - 3-134x14 LVL'S + 2-516"x1312" PLATES.SEE DETAIL 14 ON S3.02.8.AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVED STRAP TIE INDICATED INNOTE 5 @ EXTERIOR SITE OF WALL. AT SHEAR WALLS,PROVIDE TENSION TIES INDICATED IN NOTE 6 @ INTERIORSIDE OF WALL.WALL NOTES:1.INDICATES BEARING WALL BELOW.2.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) BEARING WALL STARTS ON SLAB OR BEAM.3.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) SEE ARCHDRAWINGS.4.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOODSHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDSw/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED AT 4" OC ATPANEL EDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.AT BRICK BACKUP 2x6 STUDS ARE TO BE SPACED @12" OC.5. INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE,SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDS w/ 10dGALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED @4" OC AT PANELEDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL SHEARWALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.8.AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVED STRAP TIE INDICATED INNOTE 5 @ EXTERIOR SITE OF WALL. AT SHEAR WALLS,PROVIDE TENSION TIES INDICATED IN NOTE 6 @ INTERIORSIDE OF WALL.SW1ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCAS1.04AS1.04AS1.04AS1.04W2SWP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DN312x1178LVL2x10
@16" OC
312x1178 LVL514x1178 LVL2x10
@16" OC
2x10
@16" OC514x1178LVLSEE DETAIL20 ON S3.02W2W2SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"APLAN VIEW1'-37 8" SEE ARCH DWGS2x STUD WALL514x7 LVL POST(P6)BRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSL6x8x716 LLH (CUTHORIZ LEG ASREQUIRED) OR 38"THK BENT PLHSS 5x5x38POSTHSS 5x10x38 BEAM4S3.035S3.03L6x8x716 LLH (CUT HORIZLEG AS REQUIRED) OR38" THK BENT PLMITRE JOINTPROVIDE FULLPENETRATIONWELD614" SEE
ARCH DWGS
L4x4x716NOTE:ALL STEEL TO BE HOTDIPPED GALVREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRFOURTH FLOOR FRAMING PLANS1.04LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
ELEVATOR ROOF PART PLANTOC EL 117'-814"TOS EL 117'-3"SPAN OF 2"-20 GA DECKw/ 314" LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE(TOTAL THICKNESS = 514")REINF w/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWF5S0.035S0.03W8x18CONTRACTOR-COORDINATELOCATION OF JOISTS & TRUSSESw/RECESSED LIGHTINGLOCATIONS & ALL PLUMBING /MECHANICAL - SEE ARCHDRAWINGS982016" BCI 90'S @24" OC 2x10@16" oc3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x8 3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x6
3-2x6 3-2x6
3-2x6
3-2x6
3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x6SW
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x6514x712 LVLSWSW3-2x6
3-2x6
SW SWSWSW
SWSWSW
SW
SW5 simS3.026 simS3.028 (SIM)S3.028 (SIM)S3.0212 (SIM)S3.0212 simS3.02145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPNO16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC193-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 60'S@24" OC3-2x616" BCI 90'S@24" OCSWSW1216" BCI 90'S @24" OC2x10
3-2x8J3-2x8TU16" BCI 6000'S
@24" OC
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x816 BCI 6000'S
@24" OC16 BCI 6000'S@24" OC3-2x10
W8x10
W8x10
W8x102233K@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
514x14 LVL@16" o
c 514x14 LVLFLITCHBEAM #1514x14 LVL3-2x103-2x8
SW
P5 DNP5 DNSW
SWSWSWSW
SW 22213-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x6
3-2x6 3-2x6SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW SWSW
P5 DN3-2
x
1
0MARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x126 simS3.026 simS3.023-2x63-2x10
P2 DNP2 DNP2 DNP2 DN10S3.02P5 DN9S3.0211 simS3.02P5 DN16S3.026 simS3.02C8HSS 5x10x38SW
SW 2x10@16" OC2-2x10@16" O
C
312x16 LVL
312x16 LVL3-2x83-2x8W1
W1
W2W2W2P2 DNP2 DNW1
W1
W1
W1
W1 W1
W1
W1
W1 W1W1
W2
W2
W2
P5 DNW2W2W2514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL3-2x8514x712 LVL514x712 LVLNOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.INDICATES FLUSH FRAMED CONDITIONREQUIRING JOIST HANGER SEE SCHEDULE ON S0.01.4.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" T&G PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.5. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'MST37' STRAP TIE.6. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'LTT131' TENSION TIES T&B w/ 587+5($'('52'7.FLITCH BEAM #1 - 3-134x14 LVL'S + 2-516"x1312" PLATES.SEE DETAIL 14 ON S3.02.WALL NOTES:1.INDICATES BEARING WALL BELOW.2.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) BEARING WALL STARTS ON SLAB OR BEAM.3.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) SEE ARCHDRAWINGS.4.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOODSHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDSw/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED AT 4" OC ATPANEL EDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.AT BRICK BACKUP 2x6 STUDS ARE TO BE SPACED @12" OC.5. INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE,SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDS w/ 10dGALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED @4" OC AT PANELEDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL SHEARWALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.SW1ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCBS1.05BS1.05BS1.05BS1.05SW7S0.03P6 DNP6 DNP6 DNP6 DNW2W2SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"BPLAN VIEW1'-37 8" SEE ARCH DWGS2x STUD WALL514x7 LVL POST(P6)BRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGS38" BENT PLATEw/ 6-58/$*%2/76HSS 5x5x38POSTHSS 5x10x38 BEAM614" SEE
ARCH DWGSNOTE:ALL STEEL TO BE HOTDIPPED GALVREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRROOF FRAMING PLANS1.05LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
WOODPOSTBELOW1END POST DETAIL@LVL BEAM(REQUIRED)4MULTIPLE LVL NAILING & BOLTINGPATTERN (UP TO 3 PILES)NOTE:2 ROWS OF 16d NAILS @12" OC FOR 912" LVL3 ROWS OF 16d NAILS @12" OC FOR 1178" LVL2 ROWS OF 12%2/76#2&)25/9/ 6,'(/2$' 3 ROWS OF 12%2/76#2&)25 /9/3 ROWS OF 16d NAILS @12" OC FOR UP TO 16" LVL (TOP LOAD)(TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)END BEARINGDETAIL @LVLWOODPOSTBELOWSIMPSON 'CC/ECC'COLUMN CAP SERIESEND BEARING DETAIL@LVL (REQUIRED)LVL BEAMSIMPSON 'CC/ECC'COLUMN CAP SERIESWOOD POSTABOVELVL BEAMINVERTED SIMPSONCOLUMN CAP 'CC/ECC'SERIESLVL BEAMLVL BEAMOR HEADERTRIMMERSSTRAP PER CODEIF TOP PLATE IS NOTCONTINOUS OVERHEADERSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"2SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"3SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"5SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"678SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"9SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"10SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"11SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"12SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"13SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD34" T&G PLYWOOD118" RIMBOARDI-JOISTFINISHWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD(TYP)34" T&G PLYWOODJOISTSFINISH118" RIMBOARD2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD@SHEAR WALLSSEE PLAN FORLOCATIONI-JOIST34" T&GPLYWOODFINISH2x10@16" OCJOISTHANGERCONT 2x10LEDGER w/ 38/$*6@ 16" OC T&BWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.118" RIMBOARD2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD@SHEAR WALLSSEE PLAN FORLOCATIONI-JOISTFINISH2x10@16" OCJOISTHANGERCONT 2x10LEDGER w/ 38LAGS T&B @ 16" OC8" CMU w/#5@24"V 	 GAGE WIRELADDER @16" OC H2-#5 CONT INBOND BEAM34" T&GPLYWOODFINISHI-JOISTS2-2x8 PT w/ 34EXP BOLTS @24" OCIN SOLID GROUTEDCELLS8" CMU w/ #5@24" V& #9 GAGE WIRELADDER @16" OC H2-#5 CONT INBOND BEAMFINISHI-JOIST118" RIM BOARDw/ 2-34(;3$16,21BOLTS @24" OC2x4 WEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.CONT. ICE & WATERSHIELD BETWEENRIM BOARD & CMUWALLFINISHI-JOISTI-JOISTLVL SEE PLANJOIST HANGERJOIST HANGERWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.34" T&G PLYWOODFINISHI-JOIST2x6@16" OC w/ 12"PLYWOOD @SHEARWALLS SEE PLANFOR LOCATION2x6@16" OC (U.N.O.w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12"PLYWOOD @SHEARWALLS SEE PLANFOR LOCATION3-2x TOP PLATE514x16 LVLI-JOISTWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.WEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.34" T&G PLYWOODLVL BEAMJOISTSJOISTBLOCKINGFINISH15NOTE "A" - WELD AFTERALIGNMENT TYPBRICK RELIEF ELSEE ARCH DWGCONT L6x8x716(LLH)NOTE AW BEAM, SEEPLAN FOR SIZE14SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"FLITCH BEAM #13-134"x14" LVL &2-516"x1312" PLATESw/ 12"7+58%2/76((+ @16" OC T&B FLITCH BM2"2"SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"16SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"L6x8x716 (LLH) OR38" BENT PLw/ 2-58/$*SCREWS @12" OC2x6@12" OCw/ 12" PLYWOODBRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSBRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSGRIDVARIES FROM 614" TO 734"SEE ARCH DWGSBRICK RELIEF ELSEE ARCH DWG312"ȭ BEAM2-2x NAILER w/ 12BOLTS @24" OCSTAGGERED34" T&GPLYWOOD2x6@12" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD17W BEAM SEEPLAN FOR SIZEFINISHI-JOISTI-JOIST2x6@16" OC (U.N.O. w/ W1OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD@SHEAR WALLSSEE PLAN FORLOCATIONSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"1" GYPCRETE19I-JOIST34" T&G PLYWOODFINISH2x10@16" OCSIMPSON TYPE'JB210' JOIST HANGER2x6@16" OC @SHEARWALL SEE PLAN FORLOCATIONSEE PLAN FORBEAM SIZE2-2x NAILER w/ 12THRU-BOLTS @24" OCSTAGGEREDSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"18JOIST HANGER34" T&G PLYWOODBLOCK OUTWEB ASREQUIREDW BEAM SEEPLAN FOR SIZEJOISTSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"2-2x NAILER w/ 12THRU-BOLTS @12" OCSTAGGEREDJOIST HANGERJOIST HANGERWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.2-2x NAILER w/ 12THRU-BOLTS @24" OCSTAGGERED1" GYPCRETE34" T&GPLYWOOD1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE34" T&GPLYWOOD1" GYPCRETE34" T&GPLYWOODJOIST HANGER1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE34" T&GPLYWOOD1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETEFINISHBLOCK WEB SOLID w/ 12THRU-BOLTS @24" OCSTAGGERED T&BBLOCK WEB SOLIDw/ 127+58%2/76@24" OC STAGGEREDT&BHSS 6x4x38 @4'-0" OCFINISH1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETEPROVIDEBLOCKING@24" OC38" STIFF PL ON BSVARIES FROM 614" TO 734"NOTE:1.HORIZONTAL LEG OFANGLE TO BE NOTCHEDAS REQUIRED, COORDINATEw/ ARCH DWGS2.STEEL IS HOT DIPPEDGALVANIZEDBLOCK WEB SOLIDw/ 127+58%2/76@24" OC STAGGEREDT&B6"W BEAM,SEE PLANFOR SIZENOTE:1.HORIZONTALLEG OFANGLE TO BENOTCHEDAS REQUIRED,COORDINATEw/ ARCH DWGS2.STEEL IS HOTDIPPEDGALVANIZED20L6x6x516TYPICALTYP4-34(;3%2/76INTO SOLID GROUTEDCELLSL6x6x5162-127+58%2/7634" PLYWOODLVL - SEE PLANFOR SIZE4-34(;3%2/76INTO SOLID GROUTEDCELLSSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"BLOCKING @12" OR 16" OC;MUST ALIGN w/ EXTERIORSTUDSREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:AS NOTEDBSMRRSECTIONSS3.02LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
SQ
17
16SDC
EL:
C2
9' - 1 1/2"AFF
C
EL:
C2
8' - 1"AFF
C
EL:
SOFFIT
7' - 6"AFF
D
H
G
F
B
D
DD
C
18
17SDC
EL:
C1
8' - 1"AFF
C
EL:
SOFFIT
7' - 7 1/8"AFF
D
D D
D
B
G
H
C
E RB
REVISION:
SHEET INFO:
ISSUANCE:
DATE:
SCALE:
DRAWN:
CHECKED:
Office of Peter Frothingham Registered
Architect
181 Main Street, Suite One
Northampton, MA 01060
413 585-5910
www.pfra.us
LDa Architecture & Interiors
222 Third Street, Suite 3212
Cambridge, MA 02142
617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477
www.LDa-Architects.com
6 - 03 - 16 155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060LIVE 155100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS -
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS201420
AS NOTED
IC
CTU
ENLARGED PART PLAN
P106
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"2 STUDIO ENLARGED PLAN
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"1 ONE BEDROOM ENLARGED PLAN
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"4 DOMESTIC WATER RISER DIAGRAM
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"3 HOT WATER RISER DIAGRAM
ADDENDUM #2 6-16-16
DNUPUPUPUP15FGA2012EA20249I81021414MTHLBA2021AAC7A2022A2014A2001UA2023A2013A2003A2002A2005A2025A2004LOBBY100MEN'S REST.RM119WOMEN'S REST.RM117SOUTHENTRY113SERVICEHALL005LAUNDRY114CONFERENCE111COFFICE111AKITCHEN111DNORTHENTRY118RETAIL001JANITOR112STAIR22-1STAIR33-1ELEC - LIFESAFETY1244RETAIL002RETAIL003RETAIL004JKPROJECTNORTHTRUENORTHA2011MAINTENANCE120D/DW/WHAP -RECEPTION111FLEX116ELECTRICAL121LOADING12311131312D3OPENOFFICE111BMECHANICAL115PROJECTNORTHTRUENORTHHOISTWAY4-161515NSRQP181817171616ENTRY108ENTRY105STAIR11-1191920ENTRY104ENTRY103ENTRY107ENTRY109O2122ENTRY101ENTRY102ENTRY106TEL/DATA122HALL100A21.1LIFESAFETY116AELECTRICAL111EALL GENDER REST.RM125ENTRY110REVISION:SHEETINFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.usLDa Architecture & Interiors222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.comAsindicated6 - 03 -16SECURITY PLAN -LEVEL 1155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060100% CONTRACTDOCUMENTS -CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS201420SCALE: 1/8" =1'-0"1LEVEL 1 SECURITYPLAN
ABCUPDNUPDNUPDN15FGE9I8101414MTHLBAAC7UENTRY215LAUNDRY221HALL200CSTAIR22-2STAIR33-24JELECTRICAL2271212DENTRY214ENTRY216ENTRY218ENTRY220ENTRY219ENTRY212ENTRY211EMR223TEL/DATA22561515NSRQP181817171616191920O2122STAIR11-2ENTRY210ENTRY206ENTRY204ENTRY203ENTRY205ENTRY207ENTRY209HALL200AENTRY202ENTRY201ENTRY208JANITOR22221.1ENTRY213ENTRY217REVISION:SHEETINFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.usLDa Architecture & Interiors222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.comAsindicated5/20/2016 3:06:07 PM6 - 03 -16SECURITY PLAN -LEVELS 2-4155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060100% CONTRACTDOCUMENTS -CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS201420LEVELS 2-4 SECUTRIYPLANSCALE: 1/8" =1'-0"1
LIVE 155 PFRA+LDa
155 Pleasant St June 16, 2016
Northampton, MA Addendum #2
ADDENDUM – 1
Page 1 of 16
ADDENDUM - #2
TO
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL
06-16-16
This Addendum modifies, amends and supplements designated parts of the 100% Contract Documents,
Construction Drawings & Project Manual, for the Live 155 mixed use project, dated 06-03-2016, and is
hereby made a part thereof by reference, and shall be as binding as though inserted in its entirety in the
locations designated hereunder. It shall be the responsibility of all Contractors Subcontractors and
Suppliers proposed for the various parts of the work, to incorporate any changes or modifications
contained in this Addendum in their pricing/proposals.
I. ADDENDUM TO THE 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - PROJECT MANUAL:
Addendum to the 100% Contract Documents Project Manual contains numbered item descriptions,
complete revised specification sections, and additional specification sections not previously included in the
100% Project Manual.
Description items are grouped and numbered by specification section number, i.e., 033000.1 is a
modification or addition to the specification section 033000. Complete specification sections and the table
of contents are included with changes identified in bold.
Re-issued or added specification sections will follow the drawing/specification addendum list in this
document.
II. ADDENDUM TO THE 100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - DRAWINGS:
Addendum to the 100% Contract Document Drawings contains numbered item descriptions, three
sketches and twelve (12) full size sheets.
Description items are grouped and numbered by discipline (Section), i.e., 4/A210 is a modification or
addition to drawing #2 on the Architectural plan sheet A210.
Sketches and re-issued sheets will follow the drawing/specification addendum list in this document.
LIVE 155 PFRA+LDa
155 Pleasant St June 16, 2016
Northampton, MA Addendum #2
ADDENDUM – 1
Page 2 of 16
I. ADDENDUM TO THE PROJECT MANUAL:
ITEM # SECTION # DESCRIPTION
1 064020 Revised Specification Section - Including Solid Surface Countertops
2 270000 New Specification Section - Low Voltage Cabling
3 272000 New Specification Section - IP Phone Systems
4 281000 New Specification Section - Access Control
5 282300 New Specification Section - Video Surveillance
II. ADDENDUM TO THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS:
ITEM # DISCIPLINE DESCRIPTION DWG #
1 ARCH Revised TEL/DATA room plan & ceiling plan. SKA-01/01A
2 ARCH Complete Toilet Accessory Schedule SKA-02
3 ARCH Revised Roof Plan – Fall Protection Anchor Locations A103
4 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S0.01
5 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.01
6 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.02
7 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.03
8 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.04
9 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S1.05
10 STRUCTURAL Revised drawings, notes & details. S3.02
11 PLUMBING Revised drawing. P106
12 TEL/DATA New Drawing SC101
13 TEL/DATA New Drawing SC102
14 TEL/DATA New Drawing SC103
REVISION:SHEETINFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.usLDa Architecture & Interiors222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com6 - 03 -16ENLARGED SECURITYDRAWINGS155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060100% CONTRACTDOCUMENTS -CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS201420
1
15
F
G
A201
2
E
A202
4
9
I
8
10
2
2
14
M
T
H
L
B
A202
1
A
C
7
A201
4
A200
1
U
A202
3
A201
3
A200
3
A200
2
A200
5
A202
5
A200
4
4
J
K
A201
1
11
13
12
12
D
36
2
A300
15
N
S
R
Q
P
18
18
17
17
16
16
19
19
20
O
21
22
1
A300
4
A301
3
A301
ELEVATOR HEADHOUSE
RD/ORD
1
A301
2
A301
3
A300
4
A300H.P.H.P.H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.TYP.4'-0"21.1
4
A373
H.P.
PREFINISHED ALUMINUM COPING & EXPANSION JOINT 10'-0" OC, TYP.
TYP.
10'-0"
1
A373
3
A373
ACHP-1
RTU-1
EF-1
ERV-3
2
A373
RD/ORD
H.P.
RD/ORD
RD/ORD
RD/ORD
9.1
C.1
PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS & REFRIGERANT PIPING ENTRY POINT, TYP.61'-0"2'-3 1/4"
105'-10 1/4"7'-1"54'-4"
1'-11 1/4"6'-2 1/8"2'-1 3/16"
15'-11 5/16"19'-2 15/16"38'-9 3/4"85'-8 3/4"62'-9 3/4"35'-6 3/4"7'-5 1/4"5'-3 1/2"22'-5 1/4"5'-9 1/2"110'-6 3/4"
ALIGN CENTER LINE OF TRACK POST TO GRIDLINE
FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM TIE-OFF, TYPICAL.
PTD STL CONDENSER RACK, SEE A104 FOR ADDITIONAL ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT
TYP.4'-0"TYP.3'-0"FLEXIBLE WALKWAY
ROOF HATCH
H.P.
H.P.
H.P.H.P.
H.P.H.P.
CANOPY BELOW
CRICKET, TYP.H.P.H.P.H.P.H.P.CRICKET, TYP.
PRE-FINISHED ALUMINUM CORNICE
CANOPY BELOW
ROOFTOP UNITS PER MECHANICAL
SLOPE TO
DRAIN 1/4" PER
1'-0", TYP.
SLOPE TO
DRAIN 1/4" PER
1'-0", TYP.
ROOF DRAIN/OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN & SUMP PER PLUMBING, TYP. OF 5 LOCATIONS
H.P.
22'-5"8'-6"8'-6"8'-6"34'-6"ROOF VENT PER PLUMBING
VENT PER PLUMBING
ROOF VENT PER PLUMBING
CRICKET, TYP.
ROOF CURB
42" GUARDRAIL
CL7'-9"4'-10 7/8"CL12.5°5
A373
REVISION:
SHEET INFO:
ISSUANCE:
DATE:
SCALE:
DRAWN:
CHECKED:
Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect
181 Main Street, Suite One
Northampton, MA 01060
413 585-5910
www.pfra.us
LDa Architecture & Interiors
222 Third Street, Suite 3212
Cambridge, MA 02142
617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477
www.LDa-Architects.com
1/8" = 1'-0"6/16/2016 1:54:24 PM6 - 15 - 16
TA
PM/DD
ROOF PLAN 155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060LIVE 155100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS -
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
A103201420SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 ROOF PLAN
ADDENDUM #2
REVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:NONEBSMRRGENERAL NOTES155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
LIVE 155
S0.01201420LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.comOffice of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
NOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.WB-1 ETC INDICATES BRACING ELEVATION.SEE S2.01 FOR ELEVATION & DETAILS.4.CP1 ETC INDICATES CIP PIER. SEE DETAILSON S0.02 & S3.01 FOR SIZE & REINFORCEMENT.5."F1" ETC INDICATES FOOTING TYPE SEE THISDRAWING FOR SCHEDULE.6."SF" INDICATES STEPPED FOOTING SEE DETAIL11 ON S0.02.7.ELEVATION 0'-0" EQUALS ELEVATION 124'-678".MARKTYPEREINFFOOTING SCHEDULE2 TSF (ALLOWABLE BEAM CAPACITY)F66'-0"x6'-0"x1'-4"8-#5 BEWF55'-0"x5'-0"x1'-3"5-#5 BEWF4.54'-6"x4'-6"x1'-0"5-#5 BEWF77'-0"x7'-0"x1'-8"7-#6 BEWF8A8'-0"x8'-0"x2'-0"9-#6 T&B EWF8x108'-0"x10'-0"x2'-0"-F6A6'-0"x6'-0"x2'-0"8-#5 T&B EWF88'-0"x8'-0"x2'-0"9-#6 BEW9820145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPN1912JTU2233K2221OSW SWSWSWSWSW
WB-1
WB-2
WB-3
WB-4 5" SLAB ON GRADEREINFORCE w/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWFTOC EL 0'-0"F4.5A(-2'-3")F4.5(-4'-6")F6(-5'-0")F6(-2'-4")F8A(-3'-0")F5(-4'-9")F4.5A(-3'-0")F8(-3'-0")F6A(-10'-4")CP1F6(-6'-4")F6A(-8'-0")F5(-4'-9")F6(-4'-10")F6A(-10'-4")5" SLAB ON GRADEREINFORCE w/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWFTOC EL 0'-0"F8(-4'-9")F8A(-3'-0")F8A(-5'-6")CP1F7(-5'-3")F6(-4'-10")F8(-3'-0")F8(-3'-0")F6A(-8'-4")F6A(-5'-6")F8(-5'-0")CP1F8(-5'-0")2S3.011S3.011'-3" THICK SLABw/ #6@9" T&B EWTOC EL -5'-0"F6(-4'-10")F6(-4'-10")4S3.01F5(-4'-9")F6A(-5'-6")F6A(-5'-6")F4.5(-4'-6")CP1F4.5A(-4'-9")SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW
SW SWSW
HSS 4.0 x .25POST UP (AESS)w/ 58"x12"x12"BASE PLATE +4-34$1&+25BOLTS2'-6"x2'-6"x1'-0"FOOTINGw/ 16"x16" CIPPIER2'-6"x2'-6"x1'-0"FOOTINGw/ 16"x16" CIPPIERF4.5A4'-6"x4'-6"x1'-3"5-#5 BEWF4.5A(-2'-3")C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AF4.5A(-2'-3")C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC4 UPBASE PLATETYPE AAF8(-5'-0")P2 UPP2 UPC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE AAC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE BC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC1 UPBASE PLATETYPE AC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE A28S3.018S3.01(-4'-6")13S3.0111S3.01(-4'-6")CP2(-4'-6")(-4'-6")(-4'-6")CP1F4.5A(-6'-3")SWCP4CP4CP4CP4CP4CP4CP2C3 UPBASE PLATETYPE C1CP1F8(-5'-0")SWSWC7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABF8(-3'-0")3S3.01C3 UPBASE PLATETYPE A1C3 UPBASE PLATETYPE D1C2 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE BC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE D1C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE B1C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C8 UPBASE PLATETYPE C2C3 UPBASE PLATETYPE B1C2 UPBASE PLATETYPE CC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE A1MARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x12C8HSS 5x10x38CP1F4.5A(-6'-3")C7 UPBASE PLATETYPE ABC3 UPBASE PLATETYPE A1C7 UPBASE PLATETYPE A2C7 UPBASE PLATETYPE A2C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE D13S3.01F5(-4'-9")F5(-4'-9")CPXF5(-4'-9")C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE DF5(-4'-9")(-4'-6")
SF(-4'-6")SF
(-9'-4")(-7'-4")SWSWSW
SW
SW
SWSWSWSW
C1 UP(-4'-6")(-4'-6")1'-9"25'-914"5'-0"21'-6"6'-0"4'-312"
8'-612"26'-1018"
22'-4"18'-234"18'-314"22'-4"22'-3"18'-014"22'-014"22'-0"18'-034"22'-4"8'-0"19'-6"5'-0"21'-2"6'-4"11'-1158"22'-1516"10'-4516"18'-234"5'-0"
22'-6"
5'-0"
514"9'-514"7'-3"7'-312"1ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCP5 UPP2 UPP5 UPP2 UPP5 UPP5 UPP2 UPW113S3.01(-4'-6")W1W1
W1
W1
W1 MULTIPLE PIPESTHRU FOUNDATIONWALL ALONGCOLUMNS P & Q,COORDINATEw/ PLUMBING /MECH DRAWINGS3'-0" TYPW1W1W1
W1
W1 9S3.01(-4'-6")(-4'-6")PENETRATION IN WALLFOR ELECTRICAL CONDUITS.SEE DETAIL 12 ON S0.02 FORREINFORCEMENT. COORDINATEw/ ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.CP3(-4'-6")
(-7'-0")
SF
W1
3S3.01W1
CP29S3.01(-4'-6")(-7'-0")
SF
10S3.01CP2CP1CP1GB (24x24)6" PIPE, SEEPLUMBINGDWGS(-9'-4")
4'-338"7S3.01(-7'-4")12S3.01C1 UPBASE PLATETYPE D(-9'-4")12S3.014S3.01SF(-9'-4")WALL NOTES:1.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2), SEE ARCH DRAWINGS.2.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE112x512 VERSA-STUDS @16" OC w/ 12" PLYWOODSHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD IS NAILED TOSTUDS w/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACEDAT 4" OC AT PANEL EDGES AND 12" OC ATINTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL EXTERIOR WALLSARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.AT BRICK BACKUP 112x512 VERSA-STUDS ARE TO BESPACED @12" OC.3.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISENOTED w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHINGON ONE SIDE, SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TOSTUDS w/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED@4" OC AT PANEL EDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATESUPPORTS. ALL SHEAR WALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANELJOINTS.SWW2P6 UPP6 UPP6 UPC2 UPBASE PLATETYPE DC2BASE PLATETYPE DC2BASE PLATETYPE DC2BASE PLATETYPE D16S0.02CP16" PIPE, SEEPLUMBINGDWGSREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRFOUNDATION / FIRST FLOOR PLANS1.01LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
NOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.TOP OF STEEL EL X'-X".4.WB-1 ETC INDICATES BRACING ELEVATION.SEE S2.01 FOR ELEVATION & DETAILS.5.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" T&G PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.6.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" 'FRT' PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.7. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'MST37' STRAP TIE.6. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'LTT131' TENSION TIES T&B w/ 587+5($'('52'.98203-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x6SW
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x6SW SWSW5S3.026S3.028S3.0212S3.02145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPN16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC193-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x6SWSW12JTU3-2x82233KSW 22213-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OCO514x912LVL3-2x8 2x10@16" OC2x10@16" OCSWSW SWSW
SW
SW
P5 UPP5 UPSW
SWSWSWSW
SW
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
16 BCI 6000'S
@24" OC
@16" OC2x1016" BCI 90'S16" BCI 60'S@24" OC@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
912 BCI 6500'S @16" OC WB-116" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC@24" OC16" BCI 90'S@24" OCWB-2
WB-4
W27x94
W18x50W16x40W30x90 W16x26W14x30
W27x84W24x68W18x46
W16x40
W24x62W24x68W14x30
W18x46 W14x26
W14x26
W16x26
W14x22W21x44W21x50
W30x90W24x68W18x46
W21x50
SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW SWSW
W24x84
W24x55W14x30
W24x55
W14x30 W14x30W14x30
W14x30W14x30W24x62SWW14x30W24x62W14x30
W24x62
W14x30
W24x62 W14x30W14x30W14x30
W24x62W24x62
W14x30
W24x55
W24x55W14x30W14x30
W14x30 W14x30 W24x55HSS 4.0 x .25POST DN (AESS)HSS 4.0 x .25POST DN (AESS)W8x24
2-2x12 'FRT'2x12@16" OC 'FRT'3-2x12 'FRT'2-2x12 'FRT' LEDGERLAGGED TO STUDS3-2x12 'FRT'2-2x12
'FRT'2x12@12" OC 'FRT'2x12@16" OCP5 UPW24x84W8x
1
82-2x10 LEDGERLAGGED TO STUDSHSS 1.9 x 0.188 AESSHANGER TYPICAL3 PLACES3-2
x
1
0
W16x26W16x26W16x26W16x26
P2 UPC1 DNP2 UPC1 DNC3 DNC3 DNC3 DNC7 DNC4 DNW16x31W10x22
W16x26 6S3.026S3.023-2x62x10@16" OCP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DN10S3.02C5 UPC7 DN9S3.02C5 UPC7 DNW10x22C1 DN8S3.02C1 DNW10x2212S3.02312x117 8 LVL312x1178 LVL312x1178 LVLC1 DNC1 DNW21x50
W10x30
C7 DNC7 DNC7 DNW16x26
W14x26
17S3.02W16x26
W16x36
W14x34
W14x2215S3.02W14x22W14x22W14x30W14x22
W14x22W14x22W14x22C3 DNC7 DNC7 DNC8 DNC8 DNC8 DNC8 DNC8 DNC8 DNC3 DNMARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x12C8HSS 5x10x38C2 DNC2 DNC1 DNC2 DNW14x22C2 DNC3 DNC3 DNC2 DNC3 DNC3 DNC7 DNC7 DNC1 DNC1 DNC2 DNW14x34
W16x31
2x10@16" OC'FRT'C1 DNW8x24
SW
SW
W8x18
W8x18 (
L
O
W
)
W8x18
(LOW)0"15 (SIM)S3.02'FRT'2x12@16" OC'FRT'2-2x12
'FRT'2-2x10W14x22SW312x16 LVL 3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x8SWSWSWSWSW
@24" OC
SWSW1ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCW1
W23-2x83-2x8W2BLOCK SOLIDBETWEEN WBEAMSW23-2x8W2
W1
W2P5 UP& DNP2 UP& DNW1
W1
17S3.02W1
W1
W1 W1
W1
W1
W1 W1W1
W2
P5 UPP5 UP& DNP2 UP& DN514x714 LVL
W2W2WALL NOTES:1.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) BEARING WALL STARTS ON SLAB OR BEAM.2.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) SEE ARCHDRAWINGS.3.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD ISNAILED TO STUDS w/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILSSPACED AT 4" OC AT PANEL EDGES AND 12" OC ATINTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL EXTERIOR WALLS AREBLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS. AT BRICK BACKUP 2x6 STUDSARE TO BE SPACED @12" OC.4. INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE,SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDS w/ 10dGALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED @4" OC AT PANELEDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL SHEARWALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.6.AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVED STRAP TIE INDICATED INNOTE 7 @ EXTERIOR SITE OF WALL. AT SHEAR WALLS,PROVIDE TENSION TIES INDICATED IN NOTE 8 @ INTERIORSIDE OF WALL.SW3S3.03P6 UPP6 UPP6 UPP5 DNP5 DN514x912 LVL514x912 LVL514x912 LVLW24x62514x714 LVLP2 DN1S3.03W24x55
W14x30W217S3.02FULLY BLOCKBETWEEN BCI JOIST19S3.0210'-0"W14x303-2x63-2x618S3.0219S3.02WB-3 FULLY BLOCKBETWEEN BCIJOIST514x16 LVL 514x16 LVL
19S3.02W24x62P6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UPP6 UP& DNAS1.02AS1.02A (SIM)S1.02AS1.02514x1178LVL312x1178LVL2x10
@16" OC
312x1178 LVL514x1178 LVL2x10
@16" OC
2x10
@16" OCSEE DETAIL20 ON S3.02W2W2SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A1'-37 8" SEE ARCH DWGSPLAN VIEW2x STUD WALL514x7 LVL POST(P6)BRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSL6x8x716 LLH (CUTHORIZ LEG ASREQUIRED) OR 38"THK BENT PLHSS 5x5x38POSTHSS 5x10x38 BEAM4S3.035S3.03L6x8x716 LLH (CUT HORIZLEG AS REQUIRED) OR38" THK BENT PLMITRE JOINTPROVIDE FULLPENETRATIONWELD614" SEEARCH DWGSL4x4x716NOTE:ALL STEEL TO BE HOTDIPPED GALVREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRSECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLANS1.02LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
CONTRACTOR-COORDINATELOCATION OF JOISTS & TRUSSESw/RECESSED LIGHTINGLOCATIONS & ALL PLUMBING /MECHANICAL - SEE ARCHDRAWINGS982016" BCI 90'S @24" OC 2x10@16" oc3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x6
3-2x6 3-2x6
3-2x6
3-2x83-2x8 3-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x6SW
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x6BRICK VENEERw/ CONT L6x8x716(LLH) GALVRELIEVING ANGLEw/ 2-58" LAGS @12"OC INTO STUDS &HEADERS. SEEDETAIL 16 ON S3.02FOR ADD'L NOTES.SWSW3-2x6
3-2x6
SW SWSWSW
SWSW
SW
SW5S3.026S3.028S3.0212S3.0212S3.02145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPN16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC193-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x616" BCI 60'S@24" OC3-2x6SWSW1216" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x8J3-2x8TU3-2x6 3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x816 BCI 6000'S
@24" OC
3-2x10
2233K@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
514x16 LVL@16" o
c 514x16 LVLFLITCHBEAM #1514x14 LVL3-2x6
P5 UP& DNP5 UP& DNSW
SWSWSWSW
SW 22213-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x6514x1178LVL312x1178LVL 2x10@16" OCO3-2x83-2x8 2x10@16" OC2x10@16" OC3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x10SW3-2x6
SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW SWSW
P5 UP& DNHSS 1.9 x 0.188 AESSHANGER TYPICAL3 PLACES3-2
x
1
0 6S3.026S3.023-2x63-2x10
P2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DN10S3.02C5 UP& DN9S3.0211S3.02C5 UP& DN16S3.0216S3.0216S3.028S3.022x10
@16" OC12S3.0212S3.02312x1178 LVL
312x1178 LVL312x1178 LVL312x1178 LVLMARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x12C8HSS 5x10x38SW
SW 2x10@16" OC2-2x10SW3-2x63-2x62x10
@16" O
C
312x16 LVL
312x16 LVL
3-2x68S3.023-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x81ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCW1
W1
W2W2W2P2 UPP5 DNP2 UP& DNW1
W1
W1
W1
W1 W1
W1
W1
W1 W1W1
W2
W2
W2
P5 UP& DNP5 UP& DNP2 UP& DNW2W23-2x8 514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL3-2x8514x712 LVL514x712 LVLNOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.INDICATES FLUSH FRAMED CONDITIONREQUIRING JOIST HANGER SEE SCHEDULE ON S0.01.4.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" T&G PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.5. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'MST37' STRAP TIE.6. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'LTT131' TENSION TIES T&B w/ 587+5($'('52'7.FLITCH BEAM #1 - 3-134x14 LVL'S + 2-516"x1312" PLATES.SEE DETAIL 14 ON S3.02.WALL NOTES:1.INDICATES BEARING WALL BELOW.2.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) BEARING WALL STARTS ON SLAB OR BEAM.3.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) SEE ARCHDRAWINGS.4.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOODSHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDSw/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED AT 4" OC ATPANEL EDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.AT BRICK BACKUP 2x6 STUDS ARE TO BE SPACED @12" OC.5. INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE,SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDS w/ 10dGALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED @4" OC AT PANELEDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL SHEARWALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.6.AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVED STRAP TIE INDICATED INNOTE 5 @ EXTERIOR SITE OF WALL. AT SHEAR WALLS,PROVIDE TENSION TIES INDICATED IN NOTE 6 @ INTERIORSIDE OF WALL.SW2S3.03P6 DNP6 DNP6 DNAS1.03AS1.03AS1.03AS1.03W2SWP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DN312x1178 LVL514x1178 LVL2x10
@16" OC
2x10
@16" OCSEE DETAIL20 ON S3.02W2W2SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"A1'-37 8" SEE ARCH DWGSPLAN VIEW2x STUD WALL514x7 LVL POST(P6)BRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSL6x8x716 LLH (CUTHORIZ LEG ASREQUIRED) OR 38"THK BENT PLHSS 5x5x38POSTHSS 5x10x38 BEAM4S3.035S3.03L6x8x716 LLH (CUT HORIZLEG AS REQUIRED) OR38" THK BENT PLMITRE JOINTPROVIDE FULLPENETRATIONWELD614" SEE
ARCH DWGS
L4x4x716NOTE:ALL STEEL TO BE HOTDIPPED GALVREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRTHIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLANS1.03LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
CONTRACTOR-COORDINATELOCATION OF JOISTS & TRUSSESw/RECESSED LIGHTINGLOCATIONS & ALL PLUMBING /MECHANICAL - SEE ARCHDRAWINGS982016" BCI 90'S @24" OC 2x10@16" oc3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x6
3-2x6 3-2x6
3-2x6
3-2x83-2x8 3-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x6SW
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x6BRICK VENEERw/ CONT L6x8x716(LLH)GALVRELIEVING ANGLEw/ 2-58" LAGS @12"OC INTO STUDS &HEADERS. SEEDETAIL 16 ON S3.02FOR ADD'L NOTES.SWSW3-2x6
3-2x6
SW SWSWSW
SWSW
SW
SW5S3.026S3.028S3.0212 (SIM)S3.0212S3.02145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPN16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC193-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 60'S@24" OC3-2x62x10@16" OCSWSW1216" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x8J3-2x8TU3-2x6 3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x816 BCI 6000'S
@24" OC
3-2x10
2233K@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
514x16 LVL@16" o
c 514x16 LVLFLITCHBEAM #1514x14 LVL3-2x8
P5 UP& DNP5 UP& DNSW
SWSWSWSW
SW 22213-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x6
2x10@16" OC
314x1178 LVLO3-2x83-2x8 2x10@16" OC3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x10SW3-2x6 3-2x6SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW SWSW
P5 UP& DN3-2
x
1
0 6S3.026S3.023-2x63-2x10
P2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNP2 UP& DN10S3.02P5 UPC5 DN9S3.0211S3.02P5 UPC5 DN16S3.0216S3.0216S3.028S3.02314x1178 LVL314x1178 LVL314x1178 LVLMARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x12C8HSS 5x10x38SW
SW 2x10@16" OC2-2x10SW3-2x63-2x62x10
@16" O
C
312x16 LVL
312x16 LVL
3-2x68S3.023-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x8W1
W1
W2W2W2P2 UP& DNP2 UP& DNW1
W1
W1
W1
W1 W1
W1
W1
W1 W1W1
W2
W2
W2
P5 UP& DNP5 DNP2 DNW2W23-2x8 514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL3-2x8514x712 LVL514x712 LVLNOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.INDICATES FLUSH FRAMED CONDITIONREQUIRING JOIST HANGER SEE SCHEDULE ON S0.01.4.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" T&G PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.5. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'MST37' STRAP TIE.6. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'LTT131' TENSION TIES T&B w/ 587+5($'('52'7.FLITCH BEAM #1 - 3-134x14 LVL'S + 2-516"x1312" PLATES.SEE DETAIL 14 ON S3.02.8.AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVED STRAP TIE INDICATED INNOTE 5 @ EXTERIOR SITE OF WALL. AT SHEAR WALLS,PROVIDE TENSION TIES INDICATED IN NOTE 6 @ INTERIORSIDE OF WALL.WALL NOTES:1.INDICATES BEARING WALL BELOW.2.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) BEARING WALL STARTS ON SLAB OR BEAM.3.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) SEE ARCHDRAWINGS.4.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOODSHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDSw/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED AT 4" OC ATPANEL EDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.AT BRICK BACKUP 2x6 STUDS ARE TO BE SPACED @12" OC.5. INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE,SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDS w/ 10dGALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED @4" OC AT PANELEDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL SHEARWALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.8.AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVED STRAP TIE INDICATED INNOTE 5 @ EXTERIOR SITE OF WALL. AT SHEAR WALLS,PROVIDE TENSION TIES INDICATED IN NOTE 6 @ INTERIORSIDE OF WALL.SW1ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCAS1.04AS1.04AS1.04AS1.04W2SWP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DNP6 UP& DN312x1178LVL2x10
@16" OC
312x1178 LVL514x1178 LVL2x10
@16" OC
2x10
@16" OC514x1178LVLSEE DETAIL20 ON S3.02W2W2SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"APLAN VIEW1'-37 8" SEE ARCH DWGS2x STUD WALL514x7 LVL POST(P6)BRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSL6x8x716 LLH (CUTHORIZ LEG ASREQUIRED) OR 38"THK BENT PLHSS 5x5x38POSTHSS 5x10x38 BEAM4S3.035S3.03L6x8x716 LLH (CUT HORIZLEG AS REQUIRED) OR38" THK BENT PLMITRE JOINTPROVIDE FULLPENETRATIONWELD614" SEE
ARCH DWGS
L4x4x716NOTE:ALL STEEL TO BE HOTDIPPED GALVREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRFOURTH FLOOR FRAMING PLANS1.04LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
ELEVATOR ROOF PART PLANTOC EL 117'-814"TOS EL 117'-3"SPAN OF 2"-20 GA DECKw/ 314" LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE(TOTAL THICKNESS = 514")REINF w/ 6x6-W2.9xW2.9 WWF5S0.035S0.03W8x18CONTRACTOR-COORDINATELOCATION OF JOISTS & TRUSSESw/RECESSED LIGHTINGLOCATIONS & ALL PLUMBING /MECHANICAL - SEE ARCHDRAWINGS982016" BCI 90'S @24" OC 2x10@16" oc3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x8 3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x6
3-2x6 3-2x6
3-2x6
3-2x6
3-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x6SW
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x6514x712 LVLSWSW3-2x6
3-2x6
SW SWSWSW
SWSWSW
SW
SW5 simS3.026 simS3.028 (SIM)S3.028 (SIM)S3.0212 (SIM)S3.0212 simS3.02145678ABCDEFGHILM1451011131415161718SRQPNO16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC
16" BCI 90'S @24" OC 16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC193-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 60'S@24" OC3-2x616" BCI 90'S@24" OCSWSW1216" BCI 90'S @24" OC2x10
3-2x8J3-2x8TU16" BCI 6000'S
@24" OC
3-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x63-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x63-2x63-2x816 BCI 6000'S
@24" OC16 BCI 6000'S@24" OC3-2x10
W8x10
W8x10
W8x102233K@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
@16" oc
912 BCI 6500'S
514x14 LVL@16" o
c 514x14 LVLFLITCHBEAM #1514x14 LVL3-2x103-2x8
SW
P5 DNP5 DNSW
SWSWSWSW
SW 22213-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x83-2x616" BCI 90'S @24" OC16" BCI 90'S @24" OC3-2x6
3-2x6 3-2x6SW SW SW
SW
SWSW
SW SWSW
P5 DN3-2
x
1
0MARKTYPEPOST / COLUMNSCHEDULEP12-2x6P23-2x6P3312x312 LVLP4312x514 LVLP5514x514 LVLP6514x7 LVLC1HSS 5x5x516C2HSS 5x5x38C3HSS 5x5x12C4HSS 6x6x12C5HSS 4x4x38C6HSS 6x6x58C7HSS 8x8x126 simS3.026 simS3.023-2x63-2x10
P2 DNP2 DNP2 DNP2 DN10S3.02P5 DN9S3.0211 simS3.02P5 DN16S3.026 simS3.02C8HSS 5x10x38SW
SW 2x10@16" OC2-2x10@16" O
C
312x16 LVL
312x16 LVL3-2x83-2x8W1
W1
W2W2W2P2 DNP2 DNW1
W1
W1
W1
W1 W1
W1
W1
W1 W1W1
W2
W2
W2
P5 DNW2W2W2514x712 LVL514x712 LVL514x712 LVL3-2x8514x712 LVL514x712 LVLNOTES:1.FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0.01.2.FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE S0.02 & S0.03.3.INDICATES FLUSH FRAMED CONDITIONREQUIRING JOIST HANGER SEE SCHEDULE ON S0.01.4.INDICATES SPAN OF 34" T&G PLYWOOD GLUED &NAILED TO TRUSSES, JOISTS, & BEAMS.5. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'MST37' STRAP TIE.6. INDICATES LOCATION OF SIMPSON TYPE 'LTT131' TENSION TIES T&B w/ 587+5($'('52'7.FLITCH BEAM #1 - 3-134x14 LVL'S + 2-516"x1312" PLATES.SEE DETAIL 14 ON S3.02.WALL NOTES:1.INDICATES BEARING WALL BELOW.2.INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) BEARING WALL STARTS ON SLAB OR BEAM.3.ALL INTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) SEE ARCHDRAWINGS.4.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS SHOWN STARTING ARE 2x6@16" OC(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOODSHEATHING ON ONE SIDE, PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDSw/ 10d GALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED AT 4" OC ATPANEL EDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.ALL EXTERIOR WALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.AT BRICK BACKUP 2x6 STUDS ARE TO BE SPACED @12" OC.5. INDICATES 2x6@16" OC (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEDw/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD SHEATHING ON ONE SIDE,SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD IS NAILED TO STUDS w/ 10dGALVANIZED COMMON NAILS SPACED @4" OC AT PANELEDGES AND 12" OC AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. ALL SHEARWALLS ARE BLOCKED AT PANEL JOINTS.SW1ST FLR2-2x6@12" OCWALL TYPE "W2"WALL TYPE "W1"BEARING WALL TYPE SCHEDULE2ND FLR2ND FLR3RD FLR3RD FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OC4TH FLR4TH FLR2x6@16" OC2x6@16" OCROOFROOF2-2x6@16" OC2-2x6@16" OCBS1.05BS1.05BS1.05BS1.05SW7S0.03P6 DNP6 DNP6 DNP6 DNW2W2SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"BPLAN VIEW1'-37 8" SEE ARCH DWGS2x STUD WALL514x7 LVL POST(P6)BRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGS38" BENT PLATEw/ 6-58/$*%2/76HSS 5x5x38POSTHSS 5x10x38 BEAM614" SEE
ARCH DWGSNOTE:ALL STEEL TO BE HOTDIPPED GALVREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:18" = 1'-0"BSMRRROOF FRAMING PLANS1.05LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
WOODPOSTBELOW1END POST DETAIL@LVL BEAM(REQUIRED)4MULTIPLE LVL NAILING & BOLTINGPATTERN (UP TO 3 PILES)NOTE:2 ROWS OF 16d NAILS @12" OC FOR 912" LVL3 ROWS OF 16d NAILS @12" OC FOR 1178" LVL2 ROWS OF 12%2/76#2&)25/9/ 6,'(/2$' 3 ROWS OF 12%2/76#2&)25 /9/3 ROWS OF 16d NAILS @12" OC FOR UP TO 16" LVL (TOP LOAD)(TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)END BEARINGDETAIL @LVLWOODPOSTBELOWSIMPSON 'CC/ECC'COLUMN CAP SERIESEND BEARING DETAIL@LVL (REQUIRED)LVL BEAMSIMPSON 'CC/ECC'COLUMN CAP SERIESWOOD POSTABOVELVL BEAMINVERTED SIMPSONCOLUMN CAP 'CC/ECC'SERIESLVL BEAMLVL BEAMOR HEADERTRIMMERSSTRAP PER CODEIF TOP PLATE IS NOTCONTINOUS OVERHEADERSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"2SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"3SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"5SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"678SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"9SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"10SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"11SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"12SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"13SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD34" T&G PLYWOOD118" RIMBOARDI-JOISTFINISHWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD(TYP)34" T&G PLYWOODJOISTSFINISH118" RIMBOARD2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD@SHEAR WALLSSEE PLAN FORLOCATIONI-JOIST34" T&GPLYWOODFINISH2x10@16" OCJOISTHANGERCONT 2x10LEDGER w/ 38/$*6@ 16" OC T&BWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.118" RIMBOARD2x6@16" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD@SHEAR WALLSSEE PLAN FORLOCATIONI-JOISTFINISH2x10@16" OCJOISTHANGERCONT 2x10LEDGER w/ 38LAGS T&B @ 16" OC8" CMU w/#5@24"V 	 GAGE WIRELADDER @16" OC H2-#5 CONT INBOND BEAM34" T&GPLYWOODFINISHI-JOISTS2-2x8 PT w/ 34EXP BOLTS @24" OCIN SOLID GROUTEDCELLS8" CMU w/ #5@24" V& #9 GAGE WIRELADDER @16" OC H2-#5 CONT INBOND BEAMFINISHI-JOIST118" RIM BOARDw/ 2-34(;3$16,21BOLTS @24" OC2x4 WEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.CONT. ICE & WATERSHIELD BETWEENRIM BOARD & CMUWALLFINISHI-JOISTI-JOISTLVL SEE PLANJOIST HANGERJOIST HANGERWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.34" T&G PLYWOODFINISHI-JOIST2x6@16" OC w/ 12"PLYWOOD @SHEARWALLS SEE PLANFOR LOCATION2x6@16" OC (U.N.O.w/ W1 OR W2) w/ 12"PLYWOOD @SHEARWALLS SEE PLANFOR LOCATION3-2x TOP PLATE514x16 LVLI-JOISTWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.WEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.34" T&G PLYWOODLVL BEAMJOISTSJOISTBLOCKINGFINISH15NOTE "A" - WELD AFTERALIGNMENT TYPBRICK RELIEF ELSEE ARCH DWGCONT L6x8x716(LLH)NOTE AW BEAM, SEEPLAN FOR SIZE14SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"FLITCH BEAM #13-134"x14" LVL &2-516"x1312" PLATESw/ 12"7+58%2/76((+ @16" OC T&B FLITCH BM2"2"SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"16SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"L6x8x716 (LLH) OR38" BENT PLw/ 2-58/$*SCREWS @12" OC2x6@12" OCw/ 12" PLYWOODBRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSBRICK VENEERSEE ARCH DWGSGRIDVARIES FROM 614" TO 734"SEE ARCH DWGSBRICK RELIEF ELSEE ARCH DWG312"ȭ BEAM2-2x NAILER w/ 12BOLTS @24" OCSTAGGERED34" T&GPLYWOOD2x6@12" OCw/ 12" PLYWOOD17W BEAM SEEPLAN FOR SIZEFINISHI-JOISTI-JOIST2x6@16" OC (U.N.O. w/ W1OR W2) w/ 12" PLYWOOD@SHEAR WALLSSEE PLAN FORLOCATIONSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"1" GYPCRETE19I-JOIST34" T&G PLYWOODFINISH2x10@16" OCSIMPSON TYPE'JB210' JOIST HANGER2x6@16" OC @SHEARWALL SEE PLAN FORLOCATIONSEE PLAN FORBEAM SIZE2-2x NAILER w/ 12THRU-BOLTS @24" OCSTAGGEREDSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"18JOIST HANGER34" T&G PLYWOODBLOCK OUTWEB ASREQUIREDW BEAM SEEPLAN FOR SIZEJOISTSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"2-2x NAILER w/ 12THRU-BOLTS @12" OCSTAGGEREDJOIST HANGERJOIST HANGERWEB STIFFENEREACH SIDE TYP.2-2x NAILER w/ 12THRU-BOLTS @24" OCSTAGGERED1" GYPCRETE34" T&GPLYWOOD1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE34" T&GPLYWOOD1" GYPCRETE34" T&GPLYWOODJOIST HANGER1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE34" T&GPLYWOOD1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETEFINISHBLOCK WEB SOLID w/ 12THRU-BOLTS @24" OCSTAGGERED T&BBLOCK WEB SOLIDw/ 127+58%2/76@24" OC STAGGEREDT&BHSS 6x4x38 @4'-0" OCFINISH1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETE1" GYPCRETEPROVIDEBLOCKING@24" OC38" STIFF PL ON BSVARIES FROM 614" TO 734"NOTE:1.HORIZONTAL LEG OFANGLE TO BE NOTCHEDAS REQUIRED, COORDINATEw/ ARCH DWGS2.STEEL IS HOT DIPPEDGALVANIZEDBLOCK WEB SOLIDw/ 127+58%2/76@24" OC STAGGEREDT&B6"W BEAM,SEE PLANFOR SIZENOTE:1.HORIZONTALLEG OFANGLE TO BENOTCHEDAS REQUIRED,COORDINATEw/ ARCH DWGS2.STEEL IS HOTDIPPEDGALVANIZED20L6x6x516TYPICALTYP4-34(;3%2/76INTO SOLID GROUTEDCELLSL6x6x5162-127+58%2/7634" PLYWOODLVL - SEE PLANFOR SIZE4-34(;3%2/76INTO SOLID GROUTEDCELLSSCALE: 1" = 1'-0"BLOCKING @12" OR 16" OC;MUST ALIGN w/ EXTERIORSTUDSREVISION:SHEET INFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:AS NOTEDBSMRRSECTIONSS3.02LDa Architects, LLP222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com155 Pleasant Street
Northampton, MA 01060
201420
LIVE 155Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.us100% CONTRACT DRAWINGS06/03/16ADDENDUM #206/16/16
SQ
17
16SDC
EL:
C2
9' - 1 1/2"AFF
C
EL:
C2
8' - 1"AFF
C
EL:
SOFFIT
7' - 6"AFF
D
H
G
F
B
D
DD
C
18
17SDC
EL:
C1
8' - 1"AFF
C
EL:
SOFFIT
7' - 7 1/8"AFF
D
D D
D
B
G
H
C
E RB
REVISION:
SHEET INFO:
ISSUANCE:
DATE:
SCALE:
DRAWN:
CHECKED:
Office of Peter Frothingham Registered
Architect
181 Main Street, Suite One
Northampton, MA 01060
413 585-5910
www.pfra.us
LDa Architecture & Interiors
222 Third Street, Suite 3212
Cambridge, MA 02142
617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477
www.LDa-Architects.com
6 - 03 - 16 155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060LIVE 155100% CONTRACT DOCUMENTS -
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS201420
AS NOTED
IC
CTU
ENLARGED PART PLAN
P106
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"2 STUDIO ENLARGED PLAN
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"1 ONE BEDROOM ENLARGED PLAN
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"4 DOMESTIC WATER RISER DIAGRAM
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"3 HOT WATER RISER DIAGRAM
ADDENDUM #2 6-16-16
DNUPUPUPUP15FGA2012EA20249I81021414MTHLBA2021AAC7A2022A2014A2001UA2023A2013A2003A2002A2005A2025A2004LOBBY100MEN'S REST.RM119WOMEN'S REST.RM117SOUTHENTRY113SERVICEHALL005LAUNDRY114CONFERENCE111COFFICE111AKITCHEN111DNORTHENTRY118RETAIL001JANITOR112STAIR22-1STAIR33-1ELEC - LIFESAFETY1244RETAIL002RETAIL003RETAIL004JKPROJECTNORTHTRUENORTHA2011MAINTENANCE120D/DW/WHAP -RECEPTION111FLEX116ELECTRICAL121LOADING12311131312D3OPENOFFICE111BMECHANICAL115PROJECTNORTHTRUENORTHHOISTWAY4-161515NSRQP181817171616ENTRY108ENTRY105STAIR11-1191920ENTRY104ENTRY103ENTRY107ENTRY109O2122ENTRY101ENTRY102ENTRY106TEL/DATA122HALL100A21.1LIFESAFETY116AELECTRICAL111EALL GENDER REST.RM125ENTRY110REVISION:SHEETINFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.usLDa Architecture & Interiors222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.comAsindicated6 - 03 -16SECURITY PLAN -LEVEL 1155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060100% CONTRACTDOCUMENTS -CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS201420SCALE: 1/8" =1'-0"1LEVEL 1 SECURITYPLAN
ABCUPDNUPDNUPDN15FGE9I8101414MTHLBAAC7UENTRY215LAUNDRY221HALL200CSTAIR22-2STAIR33-24JELECTRICAL2271212DENTRY214ENTRY216ENTRY218ENTRY220ENTRY219ENTRY212ENTRY211EMR223TEL/DATA22561515NSRQP181817171616191920O2122STAIR11-2ENTRY210ENTRY206ENTRY204ENTRY203ENTRY205ENTRY207ENTRY209HALL200AENTRY202ENTRY201ENTRY208JANITOR22221.1ENTRY213ENTRY217REVISION:SHEETINFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.usLDa Architecture & Interiors222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.comAsindicated5/20/2016 3:06:07 PM6 - 03 -16SECURITY PLAN -LEVELS 2-4155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060100% CONTRACTDOCUMENTS -CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS201420LEVELS 2-4 SECUTRIYPLANSCALE: 1/8" =1'-0"1
REVISION:SHEETINFO:ISSUANCE:DATE:SCALE:DRAWN:CHECKED:Office of Peter Frothingham Registered Architect181 Main Street, Suite OneNorthampton, MA 01060413 585-5910www.pfra.usLDa Architecture & Interiors222 Third Street, Suite 3212Cambridge, MA 02142617 621-1455 fax 617 621-1477www.LDa-Architects.com6 - 03 -16ENLARGED SECURITYDRAWINGS155 PLEASANT ST.NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060100% CONTRACTDOCUMENTS -CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS201420